• Skip to main content
  • Skip to primary sidebar
The Little Ferraro Kitchen logo
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Comforting Fall Recipes
  • Recipe Index
  • Cookbooks
  • About
  • Contact
search icon
Homepage link
  • Comforting Fall Recipes
  • Recipe Index
  • Cookbooks
  • About
  • Contact
×
Home » Recipes

Blog

Grilled Pineapple Pico de Gallo

May 10, 2023 · 2 Comments

Grilled pineapple pico de gallo with tortilla chips.

Sweet and smoky, this grilled pineapple pico de gallo is the perfect addition to add to fish tacos, grilled steaks and anything else you want to add a sweet and tangy condiment to. With charred pineapple, spicy jalapeño and sweet tomatoes, this pineapple pico de gallo will be your favorite sweet and tangy addition to all your summer grilling!

Pineapple pico de gallo with fresh cilantro and served with tortilla chips.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

As soon as summer hits and the weather is nice enough, we grill as many things as we can! Everything from salmon tacos, grilled steaks and grilled pizza.

And if you haven't tried grilling fruit, add it to your must make list! The heat crystallizes the sugars on the pineapple, which forms an almost bruleed exterior and making the pineapple even more sweet, flavorful and juicy.

Once the pineapple is grilled, the charred fruit is combined with sweet tomatoes, bright lime juice, cilantro and jalapeño and the combination of sweet, fresh, tart and smokey is outstanding.

🍅 Recipe Highlights

  • Pineapple pico de gallo is the perfect addition to add to your favorite summer recipes! Add a spoonful on top of shrimp ceviche tostadas or spiced fish tacos.
  • The heat from the grill caramelizes the sugars in the pineapple, creating a deliciously deep, smoky and sweet flavor!
  • Once all the chopping is done, the pico de gallo is assembled within 10 minutes!

Ingredients

Ingredients for pineapple pico de gallo with tomato and lime.
  • Pineapple: When buying a pineapple, look for one that is fragrant with a deep yellow hue, which will be sweeter and ripe.
  • Tomato: Medium sized vine ripen tomatoes are used in this pico de gallo recipe. Sweet cherry tomatoes or heirloom tomatoes, when in season, would be a great substitute too.
  • Jalapeno: For less heat, remove the seeds and ribs from the jalapeño and if you like a spicier pepper, look for serrano or fresno pepper.
  • Red Onion: To mellow out the bite from raw onion, soak it in cold water for 10 minutes before adding to the other ingredients.
  • Lime: For added smokiness, grill the lime, cut side down for a few minutes until lightly charred. The heat also makes the lime release more juice.
  • Cilantro: A classic addition to salsas and pico de gallo. If cilantro isn't available, you could substitute with finely chopped green onion or even parsley.
  • Salt: If making the pico de gallo ahead of time, don't salt until you're ready to serve. Salt will draw the moisture of out of ingredients, making a watery result.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🌶️ Substitutions and Variations

  • For extra smoky flavor, grill the lime and jalapeño.
  • Substitute sweet cherry tomatoes instead of the medium sized vine tomatoes.
  • Blend the pineapple pico de gallo to make a pineapple salsa.
  • Add diced avocado for a creamy element.

⏲️ Instructions

Grill pineapple slices until charred on the edges.

Heat an outdoor grill or grill pan on high and brush oil onto the pineapple slices. Grill the pineapple slices on both sides until the edges are slightly darkened and charred.

Add all of the pineapple pico de gallo ingredients to a bowl.

Chop up the grilled pineapple, tomato, jalapeño, red onion and cilantro and add to a bowl.

Mix the pineapple pico de gallo in a bowl until combined.

Add the lime juice and salt and mix the pineapple pico de gallo ingredients together until combined.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • For extra smoky flavor, grill the lime and then squeeze the grilled lime juice into the pineapple pico de gallo.
  • When picking a pineapple, look for one that has a deep yellow color and smells fragrant, which will be a sweeter pineapple. Green pineapples are not fully ripe yet.
  • If you prefer less heat, remove the seeds from the jalapeño.
  • Pineapple pico de gallo will last up to 4 days in the refrigerator.
  • Give the fresh lime a good roll on the counter to release all the juices
Serve grilled pineapple pico de gallo with tortilla chips and grilled lime.

Recipe FAQs

What is the difference between pico de gallo and salsa?

The difference between pico de gallo and salsa is the texture. Pico de gallo is made up of diced fruits and vegetables and salsa is a more blended mixture.

Why is my pico de gallo watery?

To prevent pico de gallo from getting too watery, don't add salt too fat in advance. Salt will draw out the moisture from the vegetables, making a watery pico de gallo. Instead, salt the pico de gallo right before serving and serve it fresh.

How do you make pico de gallo not taste bland?

For a flavorful pico de gallo that's not bland, make sure to find in season and ripe ingredients. Look for deep red tomatoes and deep yellow pineapple which will be the best tasting.

More Mexican Inspired Recipes

  • A bright and colorful salsa, filled with sweet corn, fruity mango and spicy jalapenos is the perfect addition to fish tacos.
    Sazon Spiced Salmon Tacos with Mango Corn Salsa
  • Roasted Tomatillo Salsa
  • Double the Hatch Chile Chilaquiles
  • Tilapia Ceviche

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Grilled pineapple pico de gallo with tortilla chips.
Print Recipe
5 from 7 votes

Grilled Pineapple Pico de Gallo

Grilled pineapple pico de gallo combines charred pineapple, citrus and jalapeño for a sweet and smoky condiment that's the perfect addition to summer grilling.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time10 minutes mins
Marinate20 minutes mins
Total Time40 minutes mins
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: Mexican
Keyword: grilled pineapple salsa, pineapple salsa
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 49kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Ingredients

  • ½ pineapple peeled and cut into ½ inch slices
  • 1 tablespoon avocado oil for grilling
  • 2 vine tomatoes stem removed and diced
  • 1 jalapeno finely diced
  • ½ small red onion diced
  • 1 lime cut in half
  • ¼ cup cilantro finely chopped
  • ½ teaspoon kosher salt
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Heat an outdoor grill or grill pan to high and brush oil onto the pineapple slices.
  • Grill the pineapple slices on both sides, until the edges are slightly darkened and charred, about 2-3 minutes per side.
  • Once the pineapple is grilled, remove it to a cutting board and chop the grilled pineapple into a small dice.
  • Add the chopped pineapple to a bowl, along with the chopped tomato, jalapeño, red onion and cilantro.
  • Add lime juice and salt and mix the pineapple pico de gallo ingredients together until combined.
  • If you have the time, place the pico de gallo in the refrigerator for 15-20 minutes, then serve with tortilla chips or your favorite tacos.

Notes

  • For extra smoky flavor, grill the lime and then squeeze the grilled lime juice into the pineapple pico de gallo.
  • When picking a pineapple, look for one that has a deep yellow color and smells fragrant, which will be a sweeter pineapple. Green pineapples are not fully ripe yet.
  • If you prefer less heat, remove the seeds from the jalapeño.
  • Pineapple pico de gallo will last up to 4 days in the refrigerator.

Nutrition

Calories: 49kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.02g | Sodium: 6mg | Potassium: 252mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1952IU | Vitamin C: 94mg | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 1mg

Vegetable Rice Paper Rolls (Fresh Spring Rolls)

May 8, 2023 · 6 Comments

Vegan rice paper rolls with peanut sauce.

Fresh vegetable rice paper rolls, also known as fresh Vietnamese spring rolls are packed with crisp and colorful vegetables, bright herbs and creamy avocado. The fresh spring rolls are wrapped tightly in rice paper and served with a sweet and savory creamy peanut sauce to dip into.

Vegetable rice paper rolls with peanut sauce and sweet chili sauce.

Fresh spring rolls, called nem cuốn in Vietnamese translates to salad rolls that are filled with loads of crisp vegetables wrapped tightly inside of rice paper. For an easy and fresh snack, this recipe is for vegan summer rolls and is strongly inspired by the popular Vietnamese dish. Or try my Watermelon Salad with Goat Cheese for a chilled salad.

The filling possibilities are endless. You can add cooked shrimp or leftover lemongrass chicken and other fruits and vegetables, such as lettuce, edamame and sweet mango! But whatever you do, make an extra batch of the creamy peanut sauce to dip into!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥒 Recipe Highlights

  • Easily Customizable. These rice paper rolls are full of fresh vegetables including cabbage, cucumbers and fresh herbs but the filling possibilities are endless! Add more protein such as shrimp or chicken or chile and mango for a sweet and spicy combination.
  • Light and Healthy. Rice paper rolls are naturally gluten free and make for an easy option for most diets.
  • Flavorful Creamy Peanut Sauce. You'll want to put this peanut sauce on just about anything! Make an extra batch and toss it with peanut soba noodles or a fresh cabbage salad.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for vegetable rice paper rolls, including avocado and rice noodles.
  • Rice Paper: You can often find rice paper wraps in many Western grocery stores in the International also and also in Asian grocery stores. Rice paper is a thin, translucent sheet made from rice flour that have to be soaked in water to soften.
  • Basil and Mint: Fresh herbs instantly elevate the rice paper rolls and bring a lovely layer of freshness. You can also add fresh cilantro or a combination of all three herbs.
  • Fresh Vegetables: Look for thin peeled Persian cucumber which has less seeds and will be less watery. Other vegetables are shredded purple cabbage, sweet bell peppers and carrots that are shredded or cut into thin strips. Cut all the vegetables into thin strips so they fir in the rice paper rolls easily.
  • Rice Vermicelli: These are thin rice noodles that can be found in the same aisle and store as rice paper. Rice noodles only need a few minutes of cooking, then rinse well under cold water, drain and stuff inside the vegetable summer rolls!
  • Avocado: Creamy avocado gives the crunchy fresh spring rolls a layer of decadence. When prepping ahead, cut the avocado into thin slices and squeeze fresh lemon juice on top to stop the browning.

🥜 Peanut Sauce Ingredients

  • Peanut Butter: For an ultra creamy peanut sauce for dipping, use a creamy peanut butter and not a chunky one.
  • Soy Sauce: A few dashes of soy sauce gibe the peanut sauce a savory and salty flavor.
  • Sriracha: This is a slightly sweet Vietnamese hot sauce that we drizzle on just about everything from hoisin pulled pork sliders to poke nachos and highly recommend adding sriracha to your kitchen staples.
  • Rice Vinegar: You need to add a bit of acid to break up the rich flavors of the peanut sauce. Rice vinegars slightly sweet and sharp and balances all of the flavors really well.
  • Honey: A touch of honey also balances the savory, spicy and rich flavors of the peanut sauce. Start small and add more as you'd like to not make the sauce too sweet. If making a vegan peanut sauce, substitute the honey with brown sugar.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🥑 Substitutions and Variations

  • Add something sweet, such as sliced mango.
  • For added protein, add cooked shrimp, firm tofu or cooked chicken.
  • Fry the spring rolls for a crispy cooked version. To fry, heat a wide skillet with neutral oil to 375 degrees Fahrenheit and fry the spring rolls until crisp on all sides.
  • Make spicy spring rolls and add thinly sliced jalapeño when layering the vegetables.
  • Instead of making your own peanut sauce for dipping, a good quality store bought peanut sauce would make this recipe even easier!

⏲️ Instructions

Before rolling the rice paper rolls, have all the prep done.

  • Cook the rice noodles in boiling water for 2-3 minutes and rinse under cold water and drain.
  • Cut the vegetables into thin strips.
  • Remove the herbs from the stems and slice the avocado.
Dip the rice paper into a bowl of warm water to soften.

Step 1: Dip the rice paper in a wide bowl with warm water to soften.

Layer the fresh herbs and cucumbers onto the rice paper.

Step 2: Lay the rice paper sheet on a clean and flat surface and layer herbs and strips of cucumber.

Add vegetables to the fresh spring rolls.

Step 3: Layer the vegetables on top, including the carrots, bell peppers and sliced cabbage.

Layer the rice noodles and slices of avocado to the spring rolls.

Step 4: Add ¼ cup of cooked rice noodles on top of the vegetables and a few thin slices of avocado.

Roll up the spring roll half way and tuck in the sides.

Step 5: Begin to roll the spring roll up halfway, tucking in the ends.

Continue rolling up the rice paper roll so all of the vegetables are tightly rolled in.

Step 6: Continue rolling the spring roll up until it is a tight roll.

Fresh summer rolls with avocado and served with a peanut sauce for dipping.

Step 7: Cut the rice paper rolls in half with a sharp knife and serve with a creamy peanut butter sauce to dip into.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Don't overfill the rice paper rolls with vegetables, too much filling could break the rice paper.
  • Prep beforehand. Have all the prep done before rolling the fresh spring rolls.
  • Squeeze fresh lemon juice onto the avocado to prevent it from browning.
  • Make the rice vermicelli noodles ahead of time up to 2 days in advance.
  • Fresh summer rolls are best served the same day but can be made ahead up to 2 days in advance. After that, the rice paper will begin to harden.
  • 4 ounces of dried rice noodles equals about 2 cups cooked rice noodles.

Recipe FAQs

What is the difference between spring rolls and summer rolls?

Spring rolls are typically fried or baked with a crispy outside. Summer rolls are served fresh and cold and filled with fresh vegetables.

Are summer rolls healthy?

Summer rolls are filled with fresh produce making them a healthy option to enjoy! Other healthy filling you can add to summer rolls are cooked chicken breast, tofu and shrimp.

Can you make Vietnamese spring rolls in advance?

Fresh spring rolls are best served the same day they are made but can be made up to 2 days in advance. After 2 or 3 days, the rice paper will begin to harden and won't be as soft as when they are freshly made.

More Asian Recipes

  • Asian Cabbage Salad
    Crunchy Asian Cabbage Slaw with Peanut Dressing
  • A simple salmon curry with with strong Thai flavors of ginger, galangal and lemongrass. Serve with basmati rice for a flavorful and quick weeknight dinner.
    Salmon Curry with Lemongrass and Galangal
  • Asian cucumber salad seasoned with gochugaru, sesame seeds and soy sauce.
    Spicy Korean Cucumber Salad
  • Grilled Korean short ribs with rice and kimchi.
    Kalbi Beef (Korean Beef Short Ribs)

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Vegan rice paper rolls with peanut sauce.
Print Recipe
5 from 11 votes

Vegetable Rice Paper Rolls (Fresh Spring Rolls)

Fresh vegetable rice paper rolls also called summer rolls are filled with fresh colorful vegetables, creamy avocado and served with a creamy peanut sauce for dipping.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Assembly10 minutes mins
Total Time20 minutes mins
Course: Lunch, Snack
Cuisine: Asian
Keyword: fresh spring rolls, rice paper rolls, vegetarian spring rolls, Vietnamese spring roll recipe
Servings: 8 fresh spring rolls
Calories: 204kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Ingredients

  • 8 rice paper sheets
  • 8-10 leaves fresh basil leaves hard stems removed
  • 8-10 leaves fresh mint leaves hard stems removed
  • 1 Persian cucumber peeled and cut into thin sticks (or ½ English cucumber)
  • 1-2 medium sized carrots peeled and cut into thin sticks or shredded
  • 1 red, yellow or orange bell pepper seeds removed and cut into thin sticks
  • ½ cup purple cabbage sliced thin or shredded
  • 4 ounces vermicelli cooked and cooled (about ½ a package)
  • 1 avocado sliced thin

Peanut Sauce

  • ½ cup creamy peanut butter
  • 2 tablespoons soy sauce
  • 2 teaspoons rice vinegar
  • 1 teaspoon sriracha
  • 1 teaspoon honey
  • 1 green onion sliced thin, for garnish

Other Additions

  • Sweet chili sauce for dipping
  • Lime wedges for serving
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Fill a wide bowl with warm water and dip 1 sheet of rice paper at a time, for about 30-45 seconds until the rice paper is softened.
  • Lay the moistened rice paper onto a flat clean surface and begin layering the herbs, then cucumbers, carrots, bell peppers and cabbage.
  • Layer 2-3 tablespoons worth of cooked rice noodles on top and finish with a few slices of avocado.
  • Roll the spring roll half way up and tuck the sides in and finish the rolling, making sure everything is tight and compact and the sides are not opening. Cut the fresh spring roll in half with a sharp knife.
  • To make the peanut sauce, add the creamy peanut butter, soy sauce, sriracha, rice vinegar and honey to a bowl and whisk to combine.
  • Serve rice paper rolls with peanut sauce on the side and sweet chili sauce, if desired.

Notes

  • Don't overfill the rice paper rolls with vegetables, too much filling could break the rice paper.
  • Prep beforehand. Have all the prep done before rolling the fresh spring rolls.
  • Squeeze fresh lemon juice onto the avocado to prevent it from browning.
  • Make the rice vermicelli noodles ahead of time up to 2 days in advance.
  • Fresh summer rolls are best served the same day but can be made ahead up to 2 days in advance. After that, the rice paper will begin to harden.
  • 4 ounces of dried rice noodles equals about 2 cups cooked rice noodles.

Nutrition

Calories: 204kcal | Carbohydrates: 21g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 369mg | Potassium: 313mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1890IU | Vitamin C: 26mg | Calcium: 24mg | Iron: 1mg

Zhoug Sauce (Spicy Cilantro Sauce)

May 7, 2023 · Leave a Comment

Zhoug sauce with fresh herbs, jalapeńo and cardamom.

Zhoug sauce is the spicy herby condiment you'll want to put on everything and only takes 5 minutes to make! Zhoug is a vibrant green Middle Eastern sauce that combines fresh herbs, spicy chili peppers and warm spices. Drizzle zhoug on top of roasted eggplant and crispy falafel for an extra fresh and fiery kick!

Zhug sauce is a spicy herb sauce with garlic, fresh herbs and warm spices.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🌶️ What Is Zhoug?

Zhoug (also spelled "schug," "zhug," or "skhug") is a spicy and herby Israeli condiment and is often called the "Israeli national chile paste".

Zhoug is a blended spicy cilantro sauce with hot chile's, garlic and warm spices of cardamom and cumin. The spicy herb sauce forms a thick paste and is a fantastic condiment to add to your favorite Mediterranean recipes for a fresh and fiery kick!

Add a dollop of zhug on top of vegetarian hummus bowls, drizzled onto homemade falafel or wrapped in warmed pita bread with lamb shawarma. The possibilities are endless and you'll want to always have a batch of zhoug on hand!

🌿 Recipe Highlights

  • Zhoug is the condiment you'll be adding to all your favorite Mediterranean recipes for an added fresh and spicy addition.
  • All you'll need is a food processor or blender and zhug is ready in nearly 5 minutes!

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for zhug sauce, with cardamom, fresh herbs and jalapeño.
  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh cilantro and parsley are added in this zhug recipe. Add the tender stems from the fresh herbs, which have great flavor. If cilantro isn't available, fresh mint is a great substitute.
  • Garlic: Look for garlic cloves that are tight on the garlic bulb, which means that the garlic is fresh.
  • Chile: Zhug is known for its spice, so depending on what chile you use, some will be hotter than others. Jalapeños are easily found in North America and for a hotter option, use serrano or even habanero.
  • Spices: Cardamom and cumin are warm spices that give the zhug fantastic depth of flavor. Cardamom is a pronounced flavor so start small and add more if you like.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Use any combination of herbs that you have, such as all parsley or all cilantro.
  • Add fresh mint to the zhoug sauce!
  • Depending on your spice level, add hotter peppers such as birds eye, serrano or habanero.
  • No fresh peppers? Add a dash of cayenne.

⏲️ Instructions

As long as you have a food processor or blender, making zhoug sauce couldn't be easier and done in 5 minutes!

Add the zhoug ingredients to a food processor, including the herbs, spices, garlic and jalapeño.

Step 1: Add the zhug ingredients to a food processor, including the fresh herbs, chopped jalapeño, garlic and spices.

Blend the zhoug sauce in a food processor until everything is blended well and there are no large pieces of garlic or herbs.

Step 2: Blend the zhoug well in a food processor until there are no large pieces of garlic or herbs leftover. Add a few tablespoons of water as needed to help blend and loosen the sauce.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Add the tender cilantro stems and parsley stems to the food processor. This will only enhance the fresh herb flavors!
  • Add 1-2 tablespoons of water of a time to thin out the consistency and help the food processor blend the ingredients.
  • Store the zhug sauce in an air tight container in the refrigerator for up to 1 week.
  • Freeze zhoug in a resealable plastic bag and lay fat before freezing. Or freeze the zhoug in an ice cube tray.
Zhug sauce is a spicy herb sauce with garlic, fresh herbs and warm spices.

Recipe FAQs

Can zhoug sauce be frozen?

Zhoug can easily be frozen either in a resealable plastic bag and laid flat before freeze or portioned out and frozen in an ice cube tray.

How do you use zhoug sauce?

Zhug is a delicious spicy cilantro sauce that can be used as a topping onto roasted squash or drizzled over creamy hummus. You can also add zhoug to chicken shawarma bowls and swirled into tzatziki sauce.

Where can you buy zhoug sauce?

Trader Joe's zhoug sauce is a delicious store bought option if you're not able to make homemade zhoug.

What to Serve Zhoug Sauce With

  • Lamb shawarma roast served with pickled sumac onions and pita bread.
    Slow Cooked Lamb Shawarma
  • Mediterranean hummus bowls with roasted cauliflower and chopped salad.
    Mediterranean Hummus Bowl with Fried Halloumi
  • Grilled chicken shawarma kebabs are served on top of hummus and saffron rice.
    Chicken Shawarma Skewers
  • Turkish lahmacun with lamb and sumac onions.
    Lahmacun (Turkish Pizza)

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Zhoug sauce with fresh herbs, jalapeńo and cardamom.
Print Recipe
5 from 4 votes

Zhoug Sauce (Spicy Cilantro Sauce)

Zhoug sauce is the spicy herby Middle Eastern sauce that you'll want to put on everything and only takes 5 minutes to make! With fresh herbs, chili peppers and warm spices.
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: Condiment, Sauce
Cuisine: Mediterranean, Middle Eastern
Keyword: authentic zhoug, zhoug sauce, zhug sauce
Servings: 6 servings
Calories: 87kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $5

Equipment

  • Food Processor

Ingredients

  • 1 cup fresh cilantro roughly chopped
  • 1 cup fresh parsley roughly chopped
  • 1 jalapeño roughly chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves roughly chopped
  • ½ teaspoon cumin
  • ½ teaspoon cardamom
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • water as needed to thin consistency
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Add the cilantro, parsley, chopped garlic, jalapeño, cardamom, cumin and olive oil to a food processor.
  • Blend until a smooth paste forms and there are no large leaves. Add water as needed if the mixture is too thick.
  • Transfer to a resealable container until ready to use.

Notes

    • Add the tender cilantro stems and parsley stems to the food processor. This will only enhance the fresh herb flavors!
    • Add 1-2 tablespoons of water of a time to thin out the consistency and help the food processor blend the ingredients.
    • Store the zhug sauce in an air tight container in the refrigerator for up to 1 week.
    • Yields about 1 cup of sauce.

Nutrition

Calories: 87kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 0.5g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Sodium: 104mg | Potassium: 84mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.2g | Vitamin A: 1050IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg

Simple Homemade Seafood Stock

May 6, 2023 · 3 Comments

Easy and quick homemade seafood stock made in under an hour!

In just about 30 minutes, you can make a robust homemade seafood stock that rivals any store bought stock! A simple seafood stock is a great way to use up leftover vegetable scraps and shrimp shells and instantly elevates your favorite seafood dishes, such as French bouillabaisse and garlic steamed mussels.

Homemade seafood stock with fresh thyme, carrots and garlic.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Homemade seafood stock is one of those "back pocket" recipes that we should all have in our repertoire. Making an easy homemade stock doesn't need to be an all day process and can be made in just about 30 minutes and instantly intensifies any recipe you add it to.

A simple seafood stock is the perfect use for any leftover vegetable scraps or leftover shrimp shells (after making a chilled seafood platter, perhaps?) Keep all the vegetable and seafood scraps in a resealable plastic bag in the freezer and once it gets full, you're ready to make an easy homemade seafood stock!

Make an extra batch and keep the seafood stock in the freezer and add to your favorite seafood dishes, such as steamed clams with white wine.

🍤 Recipe Highlights

  • Homemade seafood stock done in nearly 30 minutes and trumps any store bought stock!
  • Great use for leftover vegetable scraps! Save all those onion peels, carrot peels, herb stems and shrimp shells. Keep them in a large resealable bag in the freezer until ready to use!
  • Use any shellfish or fish carcases that you have leftover, such as the leftovers fish remnants from grilled branzino.
  • Homemade seafood stock elevates your seafood recipes, such as Cioppino, or linguine and clams.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for seafood stock, including shrimp shells, carrots, garlic and fresh herbs.
  • Shellfish Shells: Shrimp shells, crab shells and lobster shells are perfect for a shellfish stock. You can also use fish bones and carcasses for a seafood homemade stock. Though, stay away from clam shells and mussel shells, as they won't provide much flavor.
  • Onions and Garlic: Both are aromatics that flavor the stock. You can also use shallots, leeks, ramps and fennel.
  • Celery and Carrot: Use orange carrots, which will give the stock a lovely orange color and stay away from dark purple carrots, which can change the broth color.
  • Herbs: Use your favorite herbs to flavor the homemade seafood stock, such as fresh thyme as listed here or parsley, dill, bay leaf and rosemary.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🥕 Substitutions and Variations

  • Other seafood additions to add to the stock are lobster shells, fish bones and fish carcasses.
  • Instead of onions, add leeks or shallots.
  • Other herbs you can add to flavor the seafood stock are parsley, dill or rosemary.

⏲️ How to Make An Easy Seafood Stock

Saute the shrimp shells and crab shells for a few minutes until fragrant and lightly toasted.

Step 1: Drizzle olive oil into a Dutch oven and bring up to medium heat. Add the shellfish shells and saute for 5-7 minutes until fragrant and lightly toasted.

Add the aromatics, including the herbs, carrots, onion and celery.

Step 2: Add the carrots, onion, celery, garlic and herbs.

Simmer the seafood stock for 30 minutes.

Step 3: Pour enough water into completely cover all of the ingredients and simmer the stock for 30 minutes.

Use a spoon to skim away any impurities and foam that float to the top of the seafood stock.

Step 4: As the stock simmers, skim away any impurities or foam that float to the top.

Remove the shrimp shells and aromatics from the stock.

Step 5: Once the stock is done and deepens in color, turn off the heat and use a slotted spoon to remove the large aromatics.

Pour the stock through a sieve that is lined with a cheesecloth to catch any leftover shells.

Step 6: Place a fine mesh strainer over a large bowl and line the strainer with a layer of cheesecloth. Pour the stock through the strainer to catch any small particles leftover.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Keep veggie scraps. Keep a gallon sized resealable bag in the freezer and as you accumulate onion peels, celery ends, etc, add all the leftover scraps to the bag. Once the bag is full with vegetable scraps and shrimp shells, make the homemade seafood stock!
  • Don't add red onion or purple carrots to the stock. The dark color will turn the stock a purple-gray color (Trust me, I know this from experience).
  • If you don't have a cheesecloth, layer a few sheets of paper towels over a fine mesh strainer and strain through that.
  • Take the time to skim any foam that floats to the to as the broth simmers. This will ensure a clearer broth.
  • Add salt to your taste. Shellfish can be salty as it is. Once the stock has reduced, taste and adjust as needed.
  • To freeze, let the shellfish stock come to room temperature and store in a resealable ziplock bag. Lay flat in the freeze to freeze flat.
Recipe for seafood stock with thyme, carrots and garlic.

Recipe FAQs

What is seafood stock made of?

Seafood stock is made up of shrimp shells, crab shells and sometimes fish heads and flavored with aromatics including onions, garlic, carrots and herbs.

What can be substituted for seafood stock?

If seafood stock isn't available, substitute with clam juice or vegetable stock.

How long does homemade stock last?

Homemade seafood stock will last in the refrigerator for up to 3 days and in the freezer for up to 3 months.

Recipes to Use Homemade Seafood Stock

  • Cioppino (Italian Seafood and Tomato Stew)
    Cioppino (Seafood and Tomato Stew)
  • Clam pasta with tomatoes and garlic.
    Linguine and Clams
  • Easy French seafood stew with shrimp, mussels, clams and halibut.
    Simple Bouillabaisse Recipe (French Seafood Stew)
  • Seafood and chorizo paella is full of Pacific Northwest clams and mussels, wild salmon, spicy chorizo and garnished with sweet peas and bright lemon.
    Seafood and Chorizo Paella

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Easy and quick homemade seafood stock made in under an hour!
Print Recipe
5 from 9 votes

Easy Homemade Seafood Stock

In just about 30 minutes, you can make a robust homemade seafood stock that rivals any store bought stock! A simple seafood stock is a great way to use up leftover vegetable scraps and shrimp shells and instantly elevates your favorite seafood dishes
Prep Time16 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Total Time46 minutes mins
Course: Soup
Cuisine: American
Keyword: easy seafood stock, homemade seafood stock, homemade shellfish stock, simple seafood stock
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 353kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Dutch Oven

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 3 cups shrimp shells, shrimp heads and crab shells
  • ½ yellow onion
  • 1 celery
  • 2 carrots
  • 2 garlic cloves smashed
  • 5 sprigs of fresh thyme
  • 5 ½ cups of water

Instructions

  • Place medium sized pot over medium-high heat and drizzle with olive oil. Add shrimp shells and cook for about 5-6 minutes, lightly toasting the shells.
  • Next add onion, garlic, and thyme and pour in water. Cover pot with lid, bring to gentle boil, and cook for 30 minutes.
  • Once done, drain stock through mesh strainer, pressing onto the solids to get every last bit of stock out.
  • Allow to cool completely before storing or freezing for later use.
  • Yields approximately 5 cups stock

Notes

  • Keep veggie scraps. Keep a gallon sized resealable bag in the freezer and as you accumulate onion peels, celery ends, etc, add all the leftover scraps to the bag. Once the bag is full with vegetable scraps and shrimp shells, make the homemade seafood stock!
  • Don't add red onion or purple carrots to the stock. The dark color will turn the stock a purple-gray color (Trust me, I know this from experience).
  • If you don't have a cheesecloth, layer a few sheets of paper towels over a fine mesh strainer and strain through that.
  • Take the time to skim any foam that floats to the to as the broth simmers. This will ensure a clearer broth.
  • Add salt to your taste. Shellfish can be salty as it is. Once the stock has reduced, taste and adjust as needed.
  • To freeze, let the shellfish stock come to room temperature and store in a resealable ziplock bag. Lay flat in the freeze to freeze flat.
Yields about 4 cups of seafood stock.

Nutrition

Calories: 353kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 45g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 296mg | Sodium: 705mg | Potassium: 946mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 7g | Vitamin A: 5165IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 145mg | Iron: 2mg

Simple Bouillabaisse Recipe (French Seafood Stew)

May 3, 2023 · 14 Comments

Easy French seafood stew with shrimp, mussels, clams and halibut.

Brimming with fresh seafood, this simple bouillabaisse recipe is a luxurious French seafood stew that is made in under an hour! A variety of seafood simmers in a rustic tomato stew with aromatic saffron, savory fennel and herbs, it's truly irresistible!

French seafood stew with tomatoes, fennel and saffron.

Bouillabaisse is a French seafood stew made with a mixture of succulent seafood that is truly a seafood lover's dream! The tomato based stew simmers with floral saffron, savory leeks and fennel and a hint of citrus to bring all the fresh flavors together.

Made in a fraction of the time than traditional bouillabaisse, this recipe is strongly inspired by Julia Child's bouillabaisse recipe, but kept simple and rustic. A variety of locally sourced Pacific Northwest seafood is layered into the stew so the final product is perfectly tender. Here is a video of the bouillabaisse recipe we made with Bellingham Seafeast.

If you love classic seafood recipes such as cioppino or sole meuniere, add this simple bouillabaisse recipe to your repertoire!

Start any meal with my Goat cheese stuffed phyllo cups it's simple and impressive.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍅 Recipe Highlights

  • Traditionally, French seafood stew takes hours to make, however this simple recipe for bouillabaisse is made in under an hour and kept fresh and rustic.
  • Step by step instructions on layering seafood, so you won't have overcooked seafood and everything finishes perfectly cooked.
  • Lots of flavors and aromatics, including floral saffron, fennel and leeks, which gives fantastic flavor to the bouillabaisse.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for Bouillabaisse, a French seafood stew, including fennel, saffron and assorted seafood.
  • Leek: When using leeks, make sure to clean between the layers very well. Leeks grow in the ground and can have dirt between the layers. Only use the white and light green parts of the leek.
  • Fennel: One of my favorite vegetables, fennel is a delicious compliment to seafood. You can enjoy fennel both in raw forms and sliced in a grilled shrimp salad and sautéed in a seafood stew.
  • Tomatoes: Look for vine tomatoes that are deep in color and smell fragrant. If fresh tomatoes aren't available, substitute with a 15 ounce can of diced tomatoes.
  • Seafood Stock: Homemade seafood stock can be made in just about 30 minutes. If homemade isn't and option, look for a good quality seafood stock or clam broth.
  • Bay Leaf and Thyme: Both of these are aromatics that flavor the tomato and seafood stew. Use a few sprigs of fresh thyme, but if fresh isn't available, add ½ teaspoon of dried thyme.
  • Saffron: Also known as the world's more expensive spice, a little goes a long way. Saffron is fantastic in other Mediterranean dishes such as seafood paella and pairs with seafood very well.
  • Orange Peel: The addition of citrus is inspired by Julia Child's bouillabaisse. Use a vegetable peeler to peel a strip of orange peel and let it simmer in the stock. The orange zest pairs well with the fennel and seafood and gives the simple bouillabaisse a touch of sweetness.
  • Assorted Seafood: This is the time to use the best quality seafood that is available to you! Use a variety of seafood, such as halibut, scallops, clams, mussels and shrimp.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🧅 Substitutions and Variations

  • Use fresh and seasonal seafood, such as salmon, cod or rockfish.
  • Add a ½ cup of white wine to the stew. Let the wine reduce after adding the tomato paste (step 2 in the instructions).
  • Instead of sliced leeks, substitute with 1 whole sliced shallot.
  • Homemade seafood stock can be made in nearly 30 minutes, but if homemade isn't available, use store bought.
  • Instead of chopping fresh tomatoes, use a 15 ounce can of diced tomatoes.

⏲️ Instructions

Saute the sliced fennel and leeks until softened.

Step 1: Melt butter and olive oil in a Dutch oven, add sliced leeks and sliced fennel and saute until softened.

Add tomato paste to the sautéed leeks and fennel and saute the tomato paste into the oil and butter.

Step 2: Add the chopped garlic and saute for another minute, then add tomato paste and saute for another 1-2 minutes.

Add a pinch of saffron to the French seafood stew and saute to wake up the flavors.

Step 3: Add the chopped tomatoes and saffron and saute everything for another 1-2 minutes so the tomatoes begin to soften.

Pour the seafood stock in and add a few sprigs of fresh thyme, orange peel and bay leaf.

Step 4: Pour the seafood stock in and nestle the fresh thyme, bay leaf and orange peel into the stock. Simmer for 15 minutes so all the flavors come together.

Add the Seafood in Layers

Not all seafood is cooked at the same time. The thicker fish filets, such as halibut will take the longest to cook and the more delicate items, such as shrimp and scallops will take the least. The total cooking time for the seafood will be 10-12 minutes.

Add the halibut to the seafood stew first before the quicker cooking seafood.

Step 5: Add the halibut to the stew and simmer for 3-4 minutes.

Add the cleaned mussels and clams to the simmering seafood stew and cook for 2-3 minutes before adding the other seafood.

Step 6: Add the mussels and clams into the simmering stew, placing the pointy ends into the liquid and continue simmering for 3-4 minutes.

Add the scallops to the simmering bouillabaisse (French seafood stew).

Step 7: Nestle the scallops into the stew and continue cooking for another 2 minutes.

Add the large shrimp to to the French seafood stew and simmer until just cooked through.

Step 8: Finally, add the shrimp and finish cooking for another 2-3 minutes, until the shrimp are pink and mussels and clams just open.

Easy bouillabaisse recipe, French seafood stew with mussels, clams and halibut.

Step 9: At this point, the halibut should be cooked through and mussels and clams opened. Remove the bouillabaisse from the heat and garnish with chopped parsley and serve.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Not all seafood cooks at the same time. Add the thicker pieces first, then gradually add the more delicate seafood, such as shrimp and scallops towards the end.
  • Thicker fillets of halibut and salmon should simmer for 10-12 minutes at the most.
  • Keep the seafood on ice and in the refrigerator until ready to use.
  • Cook fresh seafood within 24 hours of buying.

Recipe FAQs

What is the difference between cioppino and bouillabaisse?

Cioppino is an Italian seafood stew with a tomato base and hearty herbs, such as oregano. Bouillabaisse is a French seafood stew seasoned with saffron and fennel.

What can I use instead of saffron in bouillabaisse?

Instead of saffron, substitute with 1 teaspoon of turmeric, which is also known as "poor man's saffron". The turmeric is earthier than saffron but will give a beautiful deep golden color to the seafood stew.

Why is bouillabaisse expensive?

Bouillabaisse is made with a variety of seafood, which can be expensive. Look for fresh seafood that is in season and locally sourced, if possible. Another reason is the addition of saffron, which is expensive. You can substitute with turmeric to keep the costs down.

🍷 What to Serve with French Bouillabaisse

  • Italian style peppers and onions as an appetizer.
  • Julia Child's Nicoise Salad
  • Lots of crusty bread to sop up the delicious sauce.
  • White wine, such as Sauvignon Blanc or Viogner.

More Seafood Inspiration

  • Mediterranean Fish Cakes full of bright lemon zest, garlic, leeks and spices and served along side smoky cumin tomato sauce and lemon horseradish to dip into.
    Mediterranean Fish Cakes with Lemon Horseradish and Cumin Tomato Sauce
  • Mediterranean grilled branzino with lemon and olive oil.
    Grilled Branzino with Lemon and Fresh Herbs
  • Lemon butter lingcod recipe that is pan seared.
    Pan Seared Lingcod in a Lemon Butter Sauce
  • Baked Clams Casino
Easy French seafood stew with shrimp, mussels, clams and halibut.
Print Recipe
5 from 15 votes

Simple Bouillabaisse (French Seafood Stew)

This simple bouillabaisse recipe is a French seafood stew that is made in under an hour! The seafood simmers with tomatoes, saffron and herbs creating an irresistible recipe.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time25 minutes mins
Total Time45 minutes mins
Course: Main
Cuisine: French, Mediterranean
Keyword: easy bouillabaisse recipe, Julia Child bouillabaisse, Julia Child seafood stew, seafood stew, simple bouillabaisse recipe
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 366kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Dutch Oven Braiser
  • Shellfish Scrubber

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 1 leek thinly sliced and washed well
  • 1 small fennel sliced
  • 4 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 2 large tomatoes chopped
  • 3-4 sprigs fresh thyme
  • 1 pinch saffron
  • 1 large piece of orange peel
  • 1 bay leaf
  • 4 cups seafood stock
  • 1 pound halibut cut into 2 inch pieces
  • 1 pound clams and/or mussels cleaned and scrubbed well
  • ½ pound scallops about 6-8 scallops
  • ½ pound medium sized shrimp
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon Ground black pepper
  • Chopped parsley leaves, finely chopped for garnish
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Bring a large wide Dutch oven to medium heat and add olive oil and butter.
  • Once melted, add the sliced leeks and fennel and sauté until softened and fragrant, but not browned. about 2-3 minutes.
  • Add the chopped garlic and sauté for another minute. Stir the tomato paste into the garlic for another 30 seconds.
  • Add the chopped tomatoes, with their juices along with the saffron, and give everything a good sauté for another 3-4 minutes until the tomatoes begin to soften and release their juices.
  • Pour the seafood stock in and nestle in the fresh thyme, bay leaf and orange peel. Simmer for 15-20 minutes.
  • While simmering, add the fish that take longer to cook, the halibut and simmer for 3-4 minutes.
  • Next, add the mussels and clams and and continue cooking for another 3-4 minutes.
  • Then add scallops and continue cooking for another 2-3 minutes and finally, add the shrimp and continue cooking for another 2-3 minutes until the shrimp are just cooked through. At this point, the fish should be cooked through and mussels and clams just opened.
  • Remove the bouillabaisse from heat and taste broth for seasoning.
  • Ladle the bouillabaisse into bowls with assorted fish and garnish with chopped parsley

Notes

    • Not all seafood cooks at the same time. Add the thicker pieces first, then gradually add the more delicate seafood, such as shrimp and scallops towards the end.
    • Scrub clams and mussels with a seafood scrubber or something similar.
    • Thicker fillets of halibut and salmon should simmer for 10-12 minutes at the most.
    • Keep the seafood on ice and in the refrigerator until ready to use.
    • Cook fresh seafood within 24 hours of buying. For another Seafood recipe with an Italian Spin, try my Halibut Piccata  or my Lemon Butter Lingcod.

Nutrition

Calories: 366kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 38g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 89mg | Sodium: 1478mg | Potassium: 1363mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1448IU | Vitamin C: 26mg | Calcium: 158mg | Iron: 3mg

Spicy Mango Margarita

May 2, 2023 · 2 Comments

Blended spicy mango margarita with a tajin rim.

Sweet, tangy, sour and spicy, this refreshing and spicy mango margarita packs a flavorful punch in every sip! The frozen mango margarita brings the sweetness of mango, the tanginess of lime juice and a fiery kick, thanks to the jalapeño simply syrup.

Jalapeño mango margarita with tamarind and tajin rim.

There is nothing more refreshing on a warm summer day than a well made margarita. Now don't get me wrong, I love a good strong margarita on the rocks with a hefty salt rim. But as soon as summer approaches, the chill of a well made frozen spicy mango margarita hits all of the taste buds!

A spicy mango margarita has layers of flavors and is made with sweet frozen mango, orange liqueur, fresh lime juice and a jalapeño simple syrup, for an added kick. I highly recommend making a batch and serving the margaritas with salmon tacos, chilled ceviche or even spicy poke nachos, which would be such a fun summer dinner party!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥭 Recipe Highlights

  • Sweet and spicy! The added jalapeño in the simple syrup gives the sweet mango a lovely warm and spicy kick!
  • Instead of lime juice, the glass is rimmed with tangy and sour tamarind, giving a fantastic puckery flavor that balances the sweet frozen mango!
  • A spicy mango margarita is the perfect accompaniment to serve alongside your tilapia ceviche and fish tacos with mango salsa.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for spicy mango margarita, including silver tequila, lime and tajin.
  • Frozen Mango: For an extra frothy chilled drink frozen mango is used. You can substitute with fresh ripe mango and if so, add extra ice to the blender.
  • Silver Tequila: Save the gold tequila for sipping and use the lighter silver tequila for cocktails.
  • Orange Liqueur: There are several styles of orange liqueur and the one used for this margarita is Cointreau. Another orange liqueur is grand marnier, which has Cognac in the mixture making the liqueur a bit sweeter.
  • Jalapeño Simple Syrup: Make your own simple syrup with equal parts sugar and water. Add a sliced jalapeno, with the seeds and simmer until slightly thickened.
  • Jalapeño: Save a few slices of jalapeño to garnish the spicy margarita.
  • Fresh Lime: Use fresh lime juice for optimal flavor. Before cutting into the lime, roll the lime on a flat surface for a few seconds to release all the juices.
  • Tajin: This is a puckery dried chili and lime mixture that can be found in most stores in the spice aisle. Tajin is fantastic sprinkled on watermelon, pineapple and mango and a perfect salty citrusy compliment to fruity margaritas.
  • Tamarind Paste (optional): Instead of rimming the glass with lime, dip the glass into tamarind paste. Tamarind is often used in Latin cuisine and has a pronounced sour flavor that balances the other sweet ingredients of the mango margarita.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • No Tajin? Instead, make this chili-lime mixture with 1 tablespoon Kosher salt, 1 tablespoon sugar, ¼ teaspoon cayenne and zest of ½ a lime.
  • For a smoky flavor, char the pineapple and jalapeño.
  • Substitute fresh mango for frozen mango. If using fresh, add an extra ½ cup of ice.
  • Make a mango margarita on the rocks. Instead of a blended margarita, substitute the frozen mango with 1 cup of mango juice, shake and pour over ice.
  • Make a mixed berry margarita with the spicy jalapeño simple syrup.

🌶️ How to Make Jalapeño Simple Syrup

  1. To a small pot, add 1 cup of white sugar, 1 cup of water and 1 sliced jalapeño (with the seeds) and bring to a simmer.
  2. Simmer the simple syrup for 5-7 minutes until the sugar has dissolved and syrup has slightly thickened.
  3. Let the syrup cool completely, then transfer to a mason jar and keep in the fridge for up to 2 weeks.

⏲️ Instructions

Add the mango margarita ingredients to a blender and blend until smooth.

Add the margarita ingredients to a blender. Add the tequila, orange liqueur, fresh lime juice and jalapeño simply syrup to a blender. Top with the frozen mango (Photo 1) and extra ice and close the blender with the lid. Blend until smooth and there are no large ice cubes left (Photo 2).

Rim a glass with tamarind (or lime juice) and tajin.

Rim the glass. Dip the glass in tamarind (Photo 3) or rim the edge with a wedge of lime and dip the rim into tajin (Photo 4).

Pour the blended mango margarita into the rimmed glass and garnish with slices of jalapeño.

Pour and garnish. Pour the spicy mango margarita into the rimmed glass (Photo 5) and garnish with jalapeño slices, if desired (Photo 6).

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Keep the blended margarita cold! For an extra frothy margarita, add an extra ½ cup of ice before blending.
  • Whenever blending a drink with frozen ingredients, add the liquid ingredients to the blender first before the frozen items. This will help the blender not work so hard and giving a smoother outcome.

Recipe FAQs

Do you need triple sec for a margarita?

You don't need triple sec for a margarita, instead add fresh lime juice and orange liqueur.

Which is better, triple sec or Cointreau?

Triple sec is a lot sweeter than Cointreau. If you like a sweeter margarita, add triple sec instead of the fresh lime juice and Cointreau.

More Drink Recipes to Try

  • Raspberry and Citrus Mezcal Cocktail
  • This passion fruit mojito is a muddled with classic flavors of mint and lime and finished with fragrant passion fruit pulp and garnished with more fresh mint.
    Passion Fruit Mojito
  • Pear and pomegranate sangria with pomegranate seeds and sliced pear.
    Pear and Pomegranate Sangria
  • Mango Swirled Coconut Margarita

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Blended spicy mango margarita with a tajin rim.
Print Recipe
5 from 4 votes

Spicy Mango Margarita

There is nothing more refreshing than a sweet and tangy frozen mango Margarita rimmed with a zippy tajin.
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Total Time5 minutes mins
Course: Drinks
Cuisine: Mexican
Keyword: blended mango margarita, mango margarita, spicy mango margarita
Servings: 2 cocktails
Calories: 255kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $5

Equipment

  • Vitamix Blender

Ingredients

Mango Margarita

  • 1 cup Frozen mango
  • 3 ounces Silver tequila
  • 1 ½ ounces Orange liqueur such as cointreau
  • 1 ounce Lime juice
  • 1 ounce Jalapeño simple syrup (recipe. below)
  • ½-1 cup Ice

Garnish

  • Jalapeño slices
  • Tamarind paste optional
  • Tajin

Jalapeño Simple Syrup

  • 1 cup white sugar
  • 1 cup water
  • 1 jalapeño sliced, with seeds
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • To a blender, add the tequila, orange liqueur, lime juice and jalapeno simple syrup. Top with the frozen mango and add and close with the lid and blend the margherita until smooth and there are no large ice cubes left.
  • Pour some tamarind paste on a plate and pour tajin on another plate. Dip the rim of a glass into the tamarind paste and then into the tajin so the edge is completely coated.
  • Pour the spicy mango margarita into the glasses and garnish with additional jalapeño slices and serve immediately.

Jalapeño Simple Syrup

  • To a small pot, add 1 cup of white sugar, 1 cup of water and 1 sliced jalapeño (with the seeds) and bring to a simmer.
  • Simmer the simple syrup for 5-7 minutes until the sugar has dissolved and syrup has slightly thickened
  • Let the syrup cool completely, then transfer to a mason jar and keep in the fridge for up to 2 weeks.

Video

Notes

    • No Tajin? Instead, make this chili-lime mixture with 1 tablespoon Kosher salt, 1 tablespoon sugar, ¼ teaspoon cayenne and zest of ½ a lime.
    • For a smokey flavor, char the pineapple and jalapeño.
    • Substitute fresh mango for frozen mango. If using fresh, add an extra ½ cup of ice.
    • Make a mango margarita on the rocks. Instead of a blended margarita, substitute the frozen mango with 1 cup of mango juice, shake and pour over ice.
    • Whenever blending a drink with frozen ingredients, add the liquid ingredients to the blender first before the frozen items. This will help the blender not work so hard and giving a smoother outcome.

Nutrition

Calories: 255kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 0.4g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Sodium: 14mg | Potassium: 171mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 29g | Vitamin A: 900IU | Vitamin C: 34mg | Calcium: 15mg | Iron: 1mg

Herbed Flatbread with Goat Cheese and Cherry Tomatoes

Apr 24, 2023 · 3 Comments

Cheese and tomato flatbread with balsamic glaze.

This herby flatbread with goat cheese is baked with sweet cherry tomatoes and dusted with grated Parmesan cheese. And the best part, this is a no yeast flatbread, making it the perfect last minute option for a quick appetizer or snack!

No yeast flatbread with goat cheese and cherry tomatoes.

If you are looking for a quick and easy appetizer that's bursting with savory and tangy flavors, you will love this no-yeast flatbread recipe topped with creamy goat cheese and juicy cherry tomatoes. For another quick impressive appetizer try my Pan Con Tomate with Jamón.

Studded with rosemary and thyme and finished with a drizzle of sweet aged balsamic right at the end, this easy flatbread recipe comes together within minutes (no mixer required), making it the perfect option for a last minute get together! And if you need any more quick appetizers, try these boursin stuffed mushrooms and these lemony Greek fries!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍅 Recipe Highlights

  • The best part of this easy flatbread recipe is that this is a no-yeast flatbread! So there is no waiting around for the bread to rise.
  • This rustic flatbread is quick to mix up and perfect for a last minute appetizer.
  • No mixer required! Just add all the dough ingredients to a bowl, mix until combined, then knead in a ball.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for cheese and tomato flatbread, including herbs and aged balsamic.
  • Flour: All purpose flour is all you need for this recipe.
  • Baking Powder: Because there is no yeast, baking powder is used as the leavening agent. The dough won't spread but will rise slightly.
  • Herbs: Fresh thyme and rosemary are chopped finely and added to the dough mixture. If fresh herbs aren't available substitute with half the amount of dried herbs.
  • Goat Cheese: Bring the goat cheese to room temperature, which will make it easier to spread onto the flatbread.
  • Parmesan Cheese: Grate a chunk of Parmesan, if available.
  • Cherry Tomatoes: Look for cherry tomatoes that are deep in color, which will be sweeter.
  • Olive Oil and Balsamic Vinegar: Olive oil is drizzled on top the cherry tomato flatbread right before baking. The aged balsamic is drizzled after baking, giving a sweet and tart layer of flavor that pairs well with the sweet roasted cherry tomatoes. An aged balsamic is ideal as a finishing garnish because of its thicker inconsistency and complex flavor.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Instead of using fresh herbs, substitute with ½ teaspoon of dried thyme and dried rosemary.
  • Top the cheese flatbread with caramelized onions or caramelized shallots, which I love using on a prosciutto pizza as well!
  • Instead of goat cheese, make a caprese flatbread and add mozzarella cheese or burrata cheese.

⏲️ Instructions

Add chopped herbs, baking powder and liquid ingredients to the flour.

Make the flatbread dough. To a bowl, add the flour, baking powder and chopped herbs (Photo 1) and stir to combine. Make a well in the center and pour in the olive oil and water (Photo 2).

Mix the dough until a ball forms, then cut in half.

Knead the dough. Mix the dough in bowl until it comes together, then transfer the dough to a lightly floured surface (Photo 3). Knead the dough for a few more minutes until smooth and divide in half (Photo 4).

Roll the dough into a 10 inch oval and place on lined baking sheet.

Roll out the flatbread dough. Lightly flour a rolling pin and roll both dough balls into a long oval, about 10 inches and ⅛ inch in thickness (Photo 5). Transfer the flatbread to a lined baking sheet (Photo 6).

Top the flatbread dough with goat cheese, cherry tomatoes and parmesan cheese.

Top the flatbreads and bake. Spread softened goat cheese onto the flatbread (Photo 7) and top with cherry tomatoes, grated Parmesan cheese and a drizzle of olive oil (Photo 8). Bake at 400 degrees Fahrenheit for 22-25 minutes.

Bake the cheese and tomato flatbread until crisp and garnish with balsamic glaze and fresh herbs.

Garnish the Tomato Flatbread. Once baked, finish the flatbreads with a drizzle of aged balsamic and fresh herbs, such as basil (Photo above).

📍 Recipe Tips

  • For an even thinner and crispier crust, cut the dough into 4 balls and roll into a thin and oval shape flatbread.
  • Bring the goat cheese to room temperature, which will make it easier to spread onto the dough.
  • Use a good quality aged balsamic to drizzle over the goat cheese flatbread. A thicker balsamic will cling to the toppings well.
  • Make the flatbread ahead of time up to 2 days in advance. When ready to serve, warm in the oven and garnish with fresh basil right before serving.

Recipe FAQs

Is flatbread the same as pizza dough?

Flatbread and pizza dough are 2 different breads, but both can be used as a flatbread. Pizza dough has yeast in it and a no-yeast flatbread uses baking powder as its leavening agent.

What other breads can be used as flatbreads?

Other bread can be used as flatbreads including homemade pita bread, naan and even pizza dough.

Can you make flatbread dough ahead of time?

Flatbread dough can be made up to 2 days in advance and frozen for a month.

More Flatbread Recipes to Try

  • Turkish lahmacun with lamb and sumac onions.
    Lahmacun (Turkish Pizza)
  • Turkish pide with two different fillings of cheese and another with spiced ground beef, peppers and tomatoes.
    Turkish Pide (Turkish Pizza) with 2 Different Fillings
  • Vegan Turkish Pizza (Lahmacun)
  • Kale and Egg Breakfast Pizza

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Cheese and tomato flatbread with balsamic glaze.
Print Recipe
5 from 10 votes

Herbed Tomato and Goat Cheese Flatbread

An easy no yeast flatbread recipe topped with creamy goat cheese, cherry tomatoes and Parmesan cheese.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time25 minutes mins
Total Time40 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer, Lunch, Snack
Cuisine: American
Keyword: flatbread with goat cheese, goat cheese flatbread, no yeast flatbread, tomato flatbread
Servings: 6 servings
Calories: 442kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Ingredients

Herbed Flatbread

  • 1 ¾ cup flour + more for dusting
  • 1 tablespoon chopped rosemary and thyme or any herbs you have leftover
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • ¾ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ cup water
  • ⅓ cup olive oil
  • 4 ounces goat cheese softened at room temperature
  • 1 cup cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • ¼ cup grated Parmesan cheese
  • Olive oil for drizzling
  • Aged balsamic for garnish
  • Basil leaves thinly sliced, for garnish (optional)
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Make the flatbread dough. To a bowl, add the flour, chopped herbs, baking powder and salt and stir to combine. Make a well in the center and pour the olive oil and water in and gradually stir the mixture until a ball of dough forms.
  • Knead the dough. Once the dough is formed, transfer to a lightly floured surface and knead a few times until the ball becomes smooth. Then divide the dough into 2 or for a thinner crust, into quarters.
  • Roll out the flatbreads. Lightly dust a rolling pin with flour and roll out each ball of dough, into a 10 inch long oval, that is ¼ inch in thickness. Transfer the flatbreads to a lined baking sheet before adding the toppings.
  • Add toppings. Spread a thin layer of softened goat cheese onto both flatbreads and top with cherry tomatoes, grated Parmesan cheese and drizzle of olive oil.
  • Bake the cheese flatbreads. Place the flatbreads into the preheated oven and bake for about 22-25 minutes, until the flatbread is lightly golden brown and slightly crisp and tomatoes softened.
  • Garnish the flatbreads. Once the flatbreads are done baking, drizzle with aged balsamic and top with thinly sliced basil.

Video

Notes

    • For an even thinner and crispier crust, cut the dough into 4 balls and roll into a thin and oval shape flatbread.
    • Bring the goat cheese to room temperature, which will make it easier to spread onto the dough.
    • Transfer the rolled out dough to the baking sheet before adding the toppings, so the dough doesn't tear.
    • Use a good quality aged balsamic to drizzle over the goat cheese flatbread. A thicker balsamic will cling to the toppings well.
    • Make the flatbread ahead of time up to 2 days in advance. When ready to serve, warm in the oven and garnish with fresh basil right before serving.
  •  
  •  
Dough recipe adapted from
Smitten Kitchen

Nutrition

Calories: 442kcal | Carbohydrates: 44g | Protein: 11g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Cholesterol: 13mg | Sodium: 549mg | Potassium: 253mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 491IU | Vitamin C: 9mg | Calcium: 103mg | Iron: 4mg

Raspberry Lemon Dutch Baby Pancake

Apr 23, 2023 · 2 Comments

Raspberry and lemon Dutch baby.

Raspberry lemon Dutch baby is a simple and impressive oven baked pancake that bursts with sweet raspberry jam and bright lemon zest. A Dutch baby pancake is a delightful treat that's perfect to serve for breakfast, brunch or even dessert!

Raspberry Dutch baby pancake in a cast iron skillet.

Raspberry lemon Dutch baby also known as a German pancake or a Dutch puff, is a delicious and fluffy pancake that is easy to make and can feed a crowd! The Dutch pancake is made with a simple batter that bakes in a hot skillet until light, puffy and perfectly golden brown.

An extra scrape of lemon zest in the batter brightens up the dutch pancake nicely. Once done, swirl a dollop of sweet raspberry jam on top of the warm pancake, a final squeeze of fresh lemon juice and dusting of powdered sugar. Serve the lemon dutch baby alongside tomato cobbler with Gruyere biscuits or sweet potato frittata for a truly delicious meal!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍋 Recipe Highlights

  • The lemon Dutch baby uses simple, easy to find staple ingredients, such as flour, eggs and milk.
  • Versatile! Use any kind of berries that are in season and or your favorite fruit jam. (This homemade rose jam would be fantastic with the fresh raspberries!)
  • Fluffy, light and slightly sweet. The sweetness comes from the raspberry jam and fresh berries.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for raspberry Dutch baby including fresh lemon and vanilla extract.
  • Flour: All purpose flour is all you need for this recipe.
  • Eggs: Leave the eggs out at room temperature for 20 minutes before adding to the batter.
  • Milk: Any milk will work for a lemon Dutch baby, either cows milk, or dairy free milk such as oat milk.
  • Vanilla Extract: A splash of vanilla extract works so well with the tart raspberries. You can also use a thicker vanilla bean paste which ahs lovely vanilla bean seeds.
  • Lemon: Use a microplane to scrape the very outside of the lemon zest and add that to the batter. Save the rest of the emon and cut it into wedges to squeeze fresh lemon juice once the Dutch pancake is cooked.
  • Butter: Use unsalted butter to melt in the hot skillet and save another tablespoon for the cooked Dutch pancake.
  • Raspberry Jam and Fresh Raspberries: If you have extra raspberries left voer, save some for stuffed challah French toast.
  • Powdered Sugar

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍒 Substitutions and Variations

  • Instead of lemon zest and lemon juice, substitute with orange for a slightly sweeter flavor that pairs well with raspberry.
  • Spread the Dutch baby with a different fruit jam, such as blackberry jam, blueberry jam or dark cherry jam.
  • Instead of fruit jam, spread a layer of sweet lemon curd or creamy Nutella.
  • Garnish with different fruit, such as sliced strawberries, blackberries or pitted cherries.
  • For a dairy free option, substitute the milk with unsweetened almond milk or oat milk.

⏲️ Instructions

Add Dutch baby pancake ingredients to blender.

Step 1: Preheat a cast iron in the oven and add the Dutch baby batter ingredients to a blender.

Blend the Dutch pancake batter in a blender.

Step 2: Blend the batter until a smooth consistency, about 10-15 seconds.

Melt butter into pre-heated cast iron.

Step 3: Remove the hot cast iron from the oven and melt 2 tablespoons of butter, coating the bottom and sides.

Pour batter into hot cast iron skillet.

Step 4: Pour the pancake batter in and place it back in the oven to cook for 20-22 minutes, until puffed and golden.

Squeeze fresh lemon juice on top of raspberry dutch baby.

Step 5: Spread another tablespoon of butter onto the warm Dutch baby pancake, raspberry jam and a squeeze of fresh lemon juice.

Dust the Dutch baby pancake with powdered sugar.

Step 6: Garnish the lemon Dutch baby with fresh raspberries and sprinkle of powdered sugar.

Raspberry lemon Dutch baby pancake topped with powdered sugar.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Use room temperature ingredients so the lemon Dutch baby can rise easily in the oven.
  • Don't overmix the batter, but mix it enough so all of the flour is incorporated and there are no lumps in the batter.
  • Preheat the cast iron in the oven for 15-20 minutes before pouring the batter in.

Recipe FAQs

Can you make a Dutch baby without a cast iron skillet?

Instead of cast iron, bake the Dutch baby pancake in a muffin tin or deep oven safe baking dish.

How do you prevent a Dutch baby pancake from deflating?

A Dutch baby pancake will rise when baking but will immediately begin to deflate as soon as it cools down. To make sure you get a good puffy outcome, make sure all of the ingredients are at room temperature and don't overmix the batter.

Can you reheat a Dutch baby pancake?

Yes, to re-heat, place the pancake in a 350 degree Fahrenheit oven and bake until warmed through.

More Breakfast Recipes to Try

  • Stuffed challah French toast is the epitome of a perfect sweet brunch recipe! Stuffed with sweet banana and dunked in the most flavorful custard, with warm cinnamon and a touch of vanilla.
    Stuffed Challah French Toast
  • Shakshuka with Kale, Mushrooms and Feta
  • Nutella Banana Bread Pudding
  • Chorizo breakfast tacos with eggs and potatoes and served with salsa on the side.
    Chorizo Breakfast Tacos with Crispy Potatoes

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Raspberry and lemon Dutch baby.
Print Recipe
5 from 8 votes

Raspberry Lemon Dutch Baby Pancake

Raspberry lemon Dutch baby is a simple and impressive oven baked pancake that bursts with sweet raspberry jam and bright lemon zest.
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time25 minutes mins
Preheating20 minutes mins
Total Time50 minutes mins
Course: Breakfast, Brunch
Cuisine: American, French
Keyword: lemon butch baby pancake, lemon raspberry dutch baby
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 242kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $5

Equipment

  • Cast Iron Skillet

Ingredients

  • 3 whole eggs room temperature
  • ½ cup all purpose flour
  • ½ cup milk room temperature
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • 3 tablespoon raspberry preserves or your favorite preserves
  • 3 tablespoons unsalted butter divided
  • Powdered sugar for garnish
  • Lemon wedges for garnish
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Preheat a cast iron in the oven at 425 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • In a food processor or blender, add the eggs, milk, flour, lemon zest and vanilla extract and blend together until everything is smooth and combined.
  • Once the cast iron is hot, carefully remove it from the oven and melt 2 tablespoons of butter, swirling around the pan to coat the bottom and sides.
  • Pour the pancake batter into the hot cast iron and place it back in the oven to bake for 22-25 minutes until puffed up and golden brown.
  • Once done, remove the cast iron from the oven and top with another tablespoon of butter, raspberry jam and fresh lemon juice. Garnish with fresh raspberries and dusting of powdered sugar.

Notes

  • Use room temperature ingredients so the lemon Dutch baby can rise easily in the oven.
  • Don't overmix the butter, but mix it enough so all of the flour is incorporated and there are no lumps in the batter.
  • Preheat the cast iron in the oven for 15-20 minutes before pouring the batter in.
Recipe adapted from NY Times Food

Nutrition

Calories: 242kcal | Carbohydrates: 24g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 149mg | Sodium: 65mg | Potassium: 124mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 490IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 65mg | Iron: 1mg

Save

Lebanese Tabbouleh Salad

Apr 23, 2023 · 3 Comments

Lebanese tabbouleh salad topped with fresh lemon and green onions.

Lebanese tabbouleh salad is one of the most popular Mediterranean salads and for good reason! This herbaceous Middle Eastern salad bursts with bright flavors of fresh lemon juice, juicy tomatoes and loads of fresh herbs. Serve tabbouleh with just about anything, including crisp falafel and creamy hummus.

Lebanese style tabbouleh salad with fine bulgur and lots of fresh parsley, mint and green onions.

There are numerous styles of tabbouleh salad, but my personal favorite is Lebanese tabbouleh salad, which is heavy on the herbs and lighter on the grain. Tabbouleh (also spelled tabouli) is one of the most popular Mediterranean salads combining fresh parsley and mint, fine bulgur and sweet tomatoes, simply dressed with fresh lemon juice and extra virgin olive oil.

The result is a healthy bulgur salad that bursts of fresh, zesty, and herbaceous flavors and pairs with just about any Mediterranean dish! Serve Lebanese tabbouleh salad with your favorite Mediterranean recipes, such as chicken shawarma skewers, on top of Mediterranean hummus bowls with creamy baba ganoush and warm pita bread.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥗 Recipe Highlights

  • Authentic tabbouleh recipe that uses fine bulgur and loads of fresh herbs!
  • Full of fresh and bright ingredients, including ripe tomatoes, fresh parsley and fresh mint leaves.
  • Tabbouleh is an easy salad to prepare! There is no cooking involved and once you have all the chopping done, the rest of the recipe is just mixing and enjoying!

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for tabbouleh salad, including fine bulgur, green onions and fresh mint.
  • Bulgur: Traditionally used in tabbouleh and quick to make. All you need is some boiling water and a few minutes.
  • Parsley: Lots and lots of fresh parsley! 1 large bunch of parsley leaves with any hearty, thick stems removed (save those for making stock). I prefer flat leaf "Italian parsley", but tabbouleh is perfect for curly parsley too.
  • Fresh Mint: Stems removed and roughly chopped
  • Green Onions: I like to use both the white and green parts, both give great flavor.
  • Tomatoes: Vine ripened or roma tomatoes are perfect. If the tomatoes are overly juicy, remove the seeds and pulp to not sog down the salad.
  • Olive Oil: This is the time to use the extra-virgin olive oil, the best tasting, fruity olive oil. My favorites are Paesano Olive Oil and Laudemio Olive Oil.
  • Lemon Juice: Fresh is best!

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Instead of flat leaf parsley, curly parsley is also traditionally used to make authentic tabbouleh.
  • For a gluten free alternative, substitute cooked quinoa instead of bulgur and make a hearty quinoa tabbouleh salad.
  • For more crunch, add finely diced Persian cucumbers into the tabbouleh salad.
  • Add more protein and include cooked black or brown lentils and make a filling lentil tabbouleh salad.

⏲️ Instructions

  1. Soak the Bulgur. Add the fine bulgur to a bowl and pour boiling water over. Place a sheet of plastic wrap on top of the bowl and let the bulgur steep, for about 20 minutes.
  2. Chop the ingredients. Remove any thick stems and chop the parsley leaves to a fine consistency and add that to a large bowl, along with the iced tomato, mint and green onions.
  3. Add the bulgur. Once the bulgur has plumped up and liquid has absorbed, fluff the bulgur with a fork and add the vegetable and herbs.
  4. Mix the tabbouleh salad. Season with salt and pepper and drizzle olive oil and lemon juice and mix well.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • This is the time to use the best quality olive oil, such as extra virgin olive oil.
  • To make this ahead if time, prepare the bulgur, chopped parsley, onions and tomato. And just before serving, add the dressing and chopped mint.
  • Don't be tempted to use a food processor! Yes, there is a lot of chopping, bit it's worth it for authentic results. A food processor can bruise and wilt the parsley.
Lebanese style tabbouleh salad with lots of fresh herbs, fine bulgur and fresh lemon juice.

Recipe FAQs

What is Lebanese tabbouleh salad made of?

Lebanese tabbouleh salad is an herbaceous salad with fresh parsley, fresh mint tossed with fine bulgur and dressed with olive oil and fresh lemon juice.

Is tabbouleh gluten free?

Traditional tabbouleh that is made with bulgur is not gluten free. However, you can make a gluten free tabbouleh by substitute quinoa and making a quinoa tabbouleh salad.

How long will tabbouleh last in the fridge?

Homemade tabbouleh can last in the fridge for up to 3 days. As the tabbouleh salad sits, the tomatoes will begin to soften. Tabbouleh is best served fresh while the herbs and vegetables are firm and juicy.

Does bulgur need to be cooked?

You do not need to cook bulgur, but bulgur does need time to soak in hot water for the grains to plump. Add bulgur to a bowl and pour boiling water on top. Place a sheet of plastic wrap over the bowl and let it steep for 20 minutes until plump. When ready, most of the water should have soaked up, then fluff with a fork and you're ready!

🥙 What to Serve Tabbouleh With

Serve tabbouleh salad with crisp romaine leaves for serving or alongside grilled meats or fish, kebabs and dips!

Serve tabbouleh salad alongside, Preserved Lemon and Yogurt Chicken, Turkish Red Pepper and Walnut Dip (Muhammara) and slow cooked lamb shawarma.

  • Shish Tawook (Grilled Chicken Skewers)
  • Chicken Shawarma Bowls
  • Turkish Kofta Kebab (Grilled Beef and Lamb Skewers)
  • A flavorful and colorful falafel bowl filled with fresh greens, Israeli chopped salad, homemade falafel and finished with a creamy tahini yogurt sauce.
    Mediterranean Falafel Bowl with Tahini Yogurt Sauce

🍅 More Hearty Salads

  • Winter Wheat Berry Salad with Butternut Squash and Brussel Sprouts
  • Pearled couscous with colorful roasted vegetables.
    Israeli Couscous Salad with Roasted Vegetables
  • Quinoa Salad with Roasted Beets, Blood Orange and Feta
  • Fresh watermelon salad with crumbles of goat cheese, cucumber and finished with chopped pistachios.
    Watermelon Salad with Goat Cheese

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Lebanese tabbouleh salad topped with fresh lemon and green onions.
Print Recipe
5 from 9 votes

Lebanese Style Tabbouleh Salad

Lebanese Style Tabbouleh Salad is easy to make and so refreshing. Made with bulgur, fresh lemon juice, sweet tomatoes and lots of freshly chopped parsley.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Total Time20 minutes mins
Course: Salad, Side Dish
Cuisine: Mediterranean
Keyword: Lebanese tabbouleh salad, tabbouleh salad recipe
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 191kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $5

Equipment

  • Nesting Bowls

Ingredients

  • 1 ½ cups boiling water
  • ½ cup fine bulgur
  • 1 bunch of flat leaf parsley thick stems removed
  • 3 stems of green onions thinly sliced
  • 1 medium sized tomato seeds removed and chopped into ¼ inch cubes
  • ¼ cup fresh mint chopped finely
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon salt
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Add bulgur to a bowl and pour boiling water over. Place a sheet of plastic wrap on top of the bowl and let the bulgur steep. Meanwhile, prep the rest of the salad.
  • Remove any hard or thick stems from the parsley, gather up all the parsley leaves and start chopping until a fine consistency and add herbs to a bowl. You should have a good 1 cup of chopped parsley.
  • Add the sliced green onions, chopped tomato and mint and gently stir to combine.
  • Check the bulgur, it should have absorbed most of the liquid and be tender. Fluff with a fork and drain any excess water and add bulgur to bowl. (Note* the bulgur will just about double in size, so add less if you prefer a more herby salad like I do.)
  • Add olive oil, lemon juice and salt and gently toss again. Taste for seasoning and adjust as needed, more lemon juice or more bulgur for instance.

Notes

I prefer the Lebanese style tabbouleh, which is heavier on the herbs, so feel free to add more or less as preferred.
This is the time to use the best quality olive oil, such as extra virgin olive oil. Other additions to tabbouleh is raw cubed cucumber for a more crunchy salad.
To make this ahead if time, prepare the bulgur, chopped parsley, onions and tomato and just before serving, add the dressing and chopped mint.

Nutrition

Calories: 191kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Sodium: 587mg | Potassium: 161mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 337IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 14mg | Iron: 1mg

Chorizo Breakfast Tacos with Crispy Potatoes

Apr 19, 2023 · 8 Comments

Chorizo breakfast tacos with eggs and potatoes and served with salsa on the side.

There is nothing better than hearty breakfast tacos! Spicy and savory, these chorizo breakfast tacos are done in nearly 25 minutes and are loaded with crispy potatoes and melty cheddar cheese, all wrapped in a warm, charred tortilla.

Breakfast tacos with chorizo and potatoes and topped with hot sauce and avocado.

Living in Southern California, I've learned a few things about what makes a great breakfast taco! Mexican breakfasts are a staple, everything from breakfast burritos to chilaquiles and good spicy breakfast tacos with chorizo.

Admittedly, I'd like to say I can be picky when it comes to breakfast tacos. There has to be a good quality hot sauce on hand, spicy sausage, some sort of crispy potatoes mixed in and each layer should be easy to bite into. Dare I say that these are best breakfast tacos? For a quick impressive appetizer try my Pan Con Tomate with Jamón.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🌮 Recipe Highlights

  • These chorizo and potato tacos have layers of flavors and textures with crispy potatoes, soft eggs and savory melty cheese.
  • Breakfast tacos are highly customizable! Make them meat free with soyrizo or even more vegetables such as sautéed spinach or kale.
  • Tacos for breakfast are perfect to make ahead! Make a batch of the chorizo egg scramble up to a day in advance and warm through when ready to assemble.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for breakfast tacos including chorizo, potatoes and eggs.
  • Tortillas: Corn tortillas is preferred due to flavor but good quality flour tortillas will always do. Take the time to char the tortillas over a flame for added flavor.
  • Eggs: Large eggs are used in this recipe and you'll need about 5 eggs for 6 tacos.
  • Milk: I always add a splash of milk to whisked eggs, which gives it more creaminess and richness.
  • Potatoes: Use a thin peeled potato such as Yukon gold, which are creamy on the inside and crisp up well on the outside. Cut the potatoes into a small dice so they cook evenly.
  • Chorizo: The chorizo used in the recipe is a Mexican style chorizo that comes in a tube. The Mexican chorizo is a lot loser, making it easy to cook with the soft scrambled eggs.
  • Cheddar Cheese: Take the time to shred a block of cheddar which will melt more easily than the pre-shredded option. As soon as the eggs are done cooking, remove from the heat and add the cheese. The warmth from the eggs will gently melt the cheese.
  • Toppings: Salsa, your favorite hot sauce, green onions and cubed avocado.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🧀 Substitutions and Variations

  • For a meatless option, use soyrizo, which uses the same spices as chorizo and has great spicy flavor!
  • Garnish the breakfast tacos with a dollop of sour cream, roasted tomatillo salsa or homemade tomatillo red chile salsa.
  • For a healthy breakfast taco, omit the chorizo and add vegetables such as sautéed spinach or kale.
  • Add different cheeses, such as creamy goat cheese or cotija cheese.
  • Add roasted hatch green chiles to the eggs!

⏲️ Instructions

Cook the cubed potatoes until the edges are crispy and golden brown.

Step 1: Cook cubed potatoes until slightly crispy and golden on the outside, about 12-15 minutes.

Once the potatoes are cooked, add the chorizo in the center of the skillet and cook until cooked through.

Step 2: Make a well in the center and add the chorizo sausage. Use a spatula to break up the sausage and cook until fully cooked through, about 5-7 minutes.

Cook the chorizo with the crispy potatoes.

Step 3: Once the sausage is fully cooked, mix the chorizo with the potatoes.

Pour the whisked eggs into the chorizo and potato mixture.

Step 4: Add more oil or butter it needed and pour in the whisked eggs into the chorizo mixture.

Scramble the eggs with the chorizo and potatoes until the eggs are just cooked through.

Step 5: Scramble the eggs into the chorizo and potato mixture until the eggs are just set.

Add shredded cheddar cheese and green onions to the chorizo and egg scramble.

Step 6: Turn the heat off and add the shredded cheddar cheese and green onions.

Char the corn tortilla directly on the stove top until the edges are lightly charred.

Step 7: Char the tortillas directly on the stove top, for about 10-15 seconds until the edges are charred.

Garnish the breakfast taco with cubed avocado and hot sauce.

Step 8: Layer the breakfast tacos with the chorizo and potato mixture and top with cubed avocado, salsa and hot sauce.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Cut the potatoes into a small dice so they cook quickly and are easier to mix with the eggs.
  • Take an extra few seconds to char the tortillas directly on the stove os the edges have a nice char to them, giving the tortillas an extra layer of flavor.
  • Whisk the eggs very well, making sure the whites and yolks are completely mixed in, which will make the eggs even fluffier and lighter.
  • As soon as the eggs are just set, turn off the heat to not overcook.
Chorizo breakfast tacos with eggs and potatoes and topped with avocado and hot sauce.

Recipe FAQs

What is chorizo made of?

Chorizo is a pork sausage with warm spices of paprika and chilies. You can find a soft Mexican style of chorizo, which is great to add to eggs or a dry chorizo which is firmer.

What do breakfast tacos include?

Include any of your favorite breakfast items in breakfast tacos! Our favorites are scrambled eggs, roasted tomatillo salsa or your favorite salsa, shredded cheddar cheese, spicy chorizo and crispy potatoes.

What are some Mexican breakfast dishes?

A few popular Mexican breakfasts are breakfast tacos with chorizo or breakfast burritos, chilaquiles with eggs and mijas.

More Breakfast Recipes to Try

  • Savory Pancetta and Cheddar Waffles
  • Double the Hatch Chile Chilaquiles
  • Shakshuka with Kale, Mushrooms and Feta
  • Stuffed challah French toast is the epitome of a perfect sweet brunch recipe! Stuffed with sweet banana and dunked in the most flavorful custard, with warm cinnamon and a touch of vanilla.
    Stuffed Challah French Toast

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Chorizo breakfast tacos with eggs and potatoes and served with salsa on the side.
Print Recipe
5 from 8 votes

Chorizo Breakfast Tacos

Spicy and savory, these chorizo breakfast tacos are loaded with crispy potatoes and melty cheddar cheese all wrapped in a warm charred tortilla.
Nutritional information and serving size is for (1) Taco.
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time20 minutes mins
Total Time25 minutes mins
Course: Breakfast
Cuisine: American, Mexican
Keyword: breakfast tacos, breakfast tacos with potatoes, chorizo breakfast tacos, chorizo tacos
Servings: 6 tacos
Calories: 260kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Equipment

  • Non-stick skillet

Ingredients

Taco Filling

  • 1 tablespoon avocado oil
  • 1 cup Yukon gold potatoes diced small
  • 4 ounces Mexican chorizo
  • 5 eggs
  • 2 tablespoons milk
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon Ground black pepper
  • ½ CUP shredded cheddar cheese
  • 1 green onion thinly sliced
  • 6 corn tortillas

Toppings

  • Avocado cut into cubes
  • Salsa for garnish
  • Hot Sauce
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Drizzle a nonstick skillet with avocado oil and place over medium heat. Add the diced potatoes and cook for 12-15 minutes until the potatoes are cooked through and golden brown.
  • Make a well in the center and add the chorizo. Use a spatula to break up the chorizo and cook until the chorizo is fully cooked through, then mix the chorizo with the potatoes.
  • Whisk the eggs and milk together until well combined and pour the whisked eggs into the chorizo mixture. Use a spatula to gently scramble the eggs until just set.
  • Once the eggs are set, turn off the heat and add the shredded cheddar cheese and green onions.
  • Char the tortillas on both sides until lightly chard, for about 30 seconds.
  • To assemble, layer the chorizo and potato egg mixture onto the charred tortillas and top with cubed avocado, salsa and hot sauce.

Video

Notes

  • Cut the potatoes into a small dice so they cook quickly and are easier to mix with the eggs.
  • Take an extra few seconds to char the tortillas directly on the stove os the edges have a nice char to them, giving the tortillas an extra layer of flavor.
  • Whisk the eggs very well, making sure the whites and yolks are completely mixed in, which will make the eggs even fluffier and lighter.
  • As soon as the eggs are just set, turn off the heat to not overcook.

Nutrition

Calories: 260kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 158mg | Sodium: 459mg | Potassium: 286mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 423IU | Vitamin C: 8mg | Calcium: 121mg | Iron: 1mg

Prosciutto and Caramelized Pear Pizza with Balsamic Glaze

Apr 17, 2023 · 2 Comments

If you are looking for a fun play on pizza with sweet and salty notes, you will love this prosciutto and pear pizza. The pears ever so lightly caramelize just enough for their sugars to release, which pairs deliciously alongside sautéed shallots, salty prosciutto and a drizzle of balsamic glaze.

Caramelized pear and prosciutto pizza with mozzarella and drizzled with aged balsamic vinegar.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

One of my favorite flavor combinations is layering sweet fruit with salty and savory ingredients. Usually, I like adding fresh fruit to salads, such as arugula pear salad, which offers a delicious refreshing bite or roasting pears and carrots for a sweet and savory side dish.

This prosciutto and pear pizza features that perfect balance of sweet and savory flavors! The pizza is layered with salty prosciutto, sweet caramelized pears and caramelized shallots, all drizzled with a tangy balsamic glaze. For another wonderful pizza combination, try my Spinach Feta Pizza.

And for a a truly impressive meal, pair the pizza with a fresh burrata caprese salad. And speaking of Burrata try my latest Pizza, Squash Blossom Pizza with Burrata is a Burrata paradise.

🍐 Why You'll Love This Recipe

  • Sweet and Savory Flavors! The combination of sweet caramelized pears with salty prosciutto is fantastic!
  • Savory spin on sweet fruit! I love adding fruit to traditionally savory recipes such as honey Dijon roast chicken with pears.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for pear and prosciutto pizza, including parmesan cheese.
  • Pizza Dough: When working with raw pizza dough, keep it at room temperature for at least 30 minutes before rolling the dough out.
  • Shallot: Shallots cook faster and are more mild than standard onions. If shallots aren't available, use thinly sliced red onion.
  • Pears: Bosc pears are crisp and sweet and hold up well to the cooking.
  • Mozzarella Cheese: A few slices of fresh mozzarella are used for this pear pizza to keep it light and not too heavy. Another favorite is buffalo milk mozzarella which has great flavor and is easily digestible for most people.
  • Parmesan Cheese: This is a hard aged Italian cheese that gives the pizza (or anything else you want to top it with) great savory and nutty flavor. I like using a microplane to freshly grate the parmesan right on top.
  • Prosciutto: This Italian dry cured ham is rich and salty and sliced very thin. You can often find prosciutto in several Italian recipes such as beef braciole or crisped up on top of roasted tomato soup.
  • Aged Balsamic: Use a balsamic glaze or a good quality aged balsamic, which will be thicker, sweeter and have more depth of flavor.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Instead of cow milk cheese, substitute buffalo milk mozzarella and substitute pecorino cheese, instead of parmesan cheese.
  • If bosc pear isn't available, look for green anjour pear, which has a nice sweetness and will caramelize easily.
  • Add other cheeses! Make a pear and blue cheese pizza and add crumbles of gorgonzola cheese.
  • Instead of sliced pears, substitute with fresh figs!

⏲️ Instructions

Cook the sliced pears in a skillet until edges are caramelized.

Step 1: Cook the sliced pears until lightly caramelized on both sides.

Stretch out the pizza on a lightly floured surface into an even 10 inch circle.

Step 2: Roll out the pizza dough on a lightly floured surface to a 9 to 10 inch circle.

Add slices of fresh mozzarella and slices of prosciutto onto the pizza.

Step 3: Brush the pizza dough with olive oil and top with fresh mozzarella and prosciutto.

Top the pear and prosciutto pizza with caramelized shallots.

Step 4: Layer the caramelized pears and caramelized shallots around the pizza. Top with grated parmesan cheese.

Transfer the pear pizza onto a hot pizza stone in a pre-heated oven.

Step 4: Transfer the pizza into a preheated oven onto a hot pizza stone and cook for 7-9 minutes until the crust is golden brown.

Pear and prosciutto pizza with mozzarella, aged balsamic, caramelized shallots and fresh basil.

Step 5: Garnish the pizza with a drizzle of aged balsamic and fresh basil.

Caramelized pear and prosciutto pizza topped with fresh basil.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • For the prefect golden pizza crust, pre-heat the oven to 550 degrees Fahrenheit for 30 minutes.
  • If you don't have a pizza stone, use a baking sheet! Turn the baking sheet upside down onto its flat side and pre-heat in the oven.
  • If the pizza dough springs back as you roll it, don't force it! Let the dough rest at room temperature for another 10-15 minutes and it will stretch easier.

Recipe FAQs

What is the best temperature to cook pizza at?

The ideal temperature for a perfect pizza is anywhere from 550 to 700 degrees Fahrenheit. If the temperature is too hot, it can burn and if it's too low, the pizza won't achieve that crisp golden crust.

Do you need to fully cook prosciutto?

Prosciutto is a cured sliced ham and doe snot need to be fully cooked. You can eat it right out of the package or crisp up the prosciutto for a salty and crisp bite.

How long do you bake pizza at 500 degrees Fahrenheit?

Bake the pizza in a preheated oven for 6-9 minutes. The hotter the oven, the quicker the pizza will cook.

More Pizza Recipes to Try

  • Bolognese Pizza
  • Ratatouille Pizza
  • Four cheese pizza with Italian sausage, roasted peppers and grated Parmesan.
    Four Cheese Pizza with Sausage and Peppers
  • Spring Pizza with Pesto, Asparagus and Fresh Lemon Zest

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Print Recipe
5 from 8 votes

Caramelized Pear and Prosciutto Pizza

If you are looking for a fun play on pizza with sweet and salty notes, you will love this pear prosciutto pizza! With sautéed shallots, mozzarella and finished with a sweet balsamic glaze.
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Total Time45 minutes mins
Course: Dinner, Main
Cuisine: American, Italian
Keyword: caramelized pear pizza, pear pizza, pear prosciutto pizza
Servings: 8 servings
Calories: 764kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Pizza Stone
  • Pizza Cutter
  • Pizza Peel

Ingredients

Caramelized Shallots

  • 2 tablespoons Olive oil
  • 1 shallot sliced thin

Pear Pizza

  • 1 pound pizza dough cut in half and at room temperature
  • Flour for dusting
  • 4 tablespoons olive oil for pears and pizza
  • 2 bosc pears sliced into ¼ inch slices
  • 8 ounces mozzarella cheese roughly torn
  • ½ cup grated Parmesan cheese + more for garnish
  • 4-6 slices of prosciutto
  • Aged balsamic for garnish
  • Basil leaves for garnish
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Pre-heat the oven to 550 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • While the oven is preheating, caramelize the shallots. Bring a medium sized skillet to medium heat and drizzle with 2 tablespoons of olive oil.
  • Add the sliced shallots and sauté until the shallots soften and edges slightly caramelize, about 5-8 minutes. Once the shallots change color and darken, remove them and set aside.
  • Wipe the same skillet clean and drizzle a bit more olive oil. Add the sliced pears and cook until the pears just deepen in color and smell sweet, for about 4-6 minutes. Then turn over and caramelize the other side for another 3-4 minutes. Once done, remove and set aside.
  • Lightly dust a clean surface with flour and divide the pizza dough in half.
  • Roll each dough ball into a 9–10-inch circle and drizzle the center of the dough with 1-2 tablespoons of olive oil.
  • Top both pizzas with roughly torn mozzarella and grated parmesan cheese. Gently tear large slices of prosciutto and place the slices around the pizza, along with the slices of caramelized pears.
  • Finish with a few dollops of the caramelized shallots around the pizza and drizzle with olive oil.
  • Transfer the pizza to the hot oven on either a pizza stone or baking sheet and bake until the crust is golden brown and cheese melts, about 7-10 minutes.
  • Once done, garnish drizzled the pizzas with aged balsamic and fresh basil leaves.

Video

Notes

    • For the prefect golden pizza crust, pre-heat the oven to 500 degrees Fahrenheit for 30 minutes.
    • If you don't have a pizza stone, use a baking sheet! Turn the baking sheet upside down onto its flat side and pre-heat in the oven.
    • If the pizza dough springs back as you roll it, don't force it! Let the dough rest at room temperature for another 10-15 minutes and it will stretch easier.
    • Yields 2 medium sized pizzas

Nutrition

Calories: 764kcal | Carbohydrates: 71g | Protein: 27g | Fat: 43g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 18g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 44mg | Sodium: 1521mg | Potassium: 152mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 131IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 199mg | Iron: 4mg

Julia Child's Creamy Potato Leek Soup

Apr 17, 2023 · 30 Comments

Julia Child's creamy potato leek soup with fresh thyme and olive oil on top.

Inspired by Julia Child's creamy potato leek soup, this classic French soup is comforting and easy to make with just a handful of ingredients! The easy potato leek soup features sautéed leeks, creamy potatoes and a touch of cream that is blended until velvety smooth.

Creamy potato leek soup topped with fresh thyme and a drizzle of olive oil.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

About This Recipe

If you are looking to dip into the world of French cooking and find that making a coq au vin or Julia Child's cheese souffle is too tedious, try this easy and creamy potato leek soup!

The classic French soup is inspired by Julia Child's potato leek soup also called, vichyssoise and is made with simple ingredients and has minimal cooking steps.

As a summertime soup, serve Julia Child's Creamy Potato Leek Soup chilled.

🥣 Why You'll Love This Recipe

  • Simple ingredients! All of the flavors in this creamy potato leek soup come from the simplest of ingredients including potatoes, leeks and vegetable stock.
  • Versatile! Potato leek soup is one of the most versatile recipes. Don't have cream? Omit it or substitute milk or just leave it out altogether!
  • Freezes well! Make a double batch of the potato leek soup and store half of it in the freezer. Pour it into a resealable bag, lay flat and freeze.
  • Perfect weeknight recipe! The entire recipe can be made in under 40 minutes! And if you have the prep done, it can be done even faster

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for creamy potato leek soup, including vegetable stock and heavy cream.
  • Potatoes: Yukon gold potatoes are used in the recipe because they blend well into a creamy consistency and won't get "gummy". For more texture, keep the peels on but for an ultra creamy potato soup, take the time to peel the potatoes.
  • Leeks: Use only the light green and white parts of the leek, the dark greens are too thick and fibrous to cook down. You can also slice, clean and freeze prepped leeks. And may I suggest saving some to make a potato leek tart!
  • Vegetable Stock: Use a flavorful vegetable stock or even chicken stock, since there are minimal ingredients in the soup. I like using a stock base.
  • Butter and Oil: Both help saute the leeks and give the soup great flavor.
  • Heavy Cream: You'll only need a splash of cream to add creaminess to the potato soup. If cream isn't available, use milk, non-dairy milk such as oat milk or omit the cream altogether.
  • Herbs: Fresh thyme adds a lovely herby aroma to the soup. if thyme isn't available, use finely minced chives or parsley to garnish.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🥔 Substitutions and Variations

  • For more texture, leave the peel on the potatoes.
  • For a rustic potato leek soup, don't blend the soup and leave it thick and chunky. Or blend some of the soup to thicken the base.
  • For a vegan potato leek soup, add a splash of oat milk or omit the milk all together. As long as it's blended well, the soup will be thick and creamy.
  • Garnish the soup with other herbs such as chives or parsley.
  • Add different toppings such as smoked salt, crispy prosciutto or crispy bacon.
  • Serve it chilled! Traditional vichyssoise is served chilled and is so refreshing on a warm day.

⏲️ Instructions

Saute the sliced leeks until just softened.

Step 1: Melt butter and olive oil over medium heat and add leeks. Saute the leeks until softened but not browned.

Add the cubed potatoes to the leeks.

Step 2: Add the cubed potatoes and season with salt and pepper.

Add enough vegetable stock to cover all of the potatoes and leeks.

Step 3: Pour enough vegetable stock to completely cover the potatoes and leeks and bring up to a strong simmer.

Cook the potatoes until a fork can easily pierce through the potato.

Step 4: Cook the potato leek soup until the potatoes are soft and you can easily pierce a fork through a potato.

Use an immersion blender to blend the potato leek soup right in the pot.

Step 5: Blend the soup using an immersion blender or high powered blender until incredibly smooth.

For an incredibly smooth soup, blend the cooked potato leek soup in a blender until smooth.

Step 5 (Alternate Option): If using a high powered blender, don't fill the soup all the way to the top if it's hot. Start on low speed and gradually go faster until the soup is very smooth.

Once the potato leek soup is blended and smooth, stir in heavy cream.

Step 6: Pour in heavy cream or milk and stir to combine.

Creamy potato leek soup topped with fresh thyme and a drizzle of olive oil.

Step 7: Ladle the soup into bowls and garnish with chopped thyme, ground black pepper and drizzle of olive oil.

Easy potato leek soup that is incredibly creamy and garnished with fresh thyme and olive oil.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Use only the light green and white parts of the leek. The very dark green are too fibrous and won't blend well. Save those to make a homemade stock!
  • Add enough stock not completely cover the vegetables. If there's not enough liquid, it could make the soup gummy.
  • Saute the leeks before adding the other ingredients to soften and sweeten them.
  • Blend the soup while it's still warm so it blends easily and becomes creamy.
  • Leeks freeze very well! Slice the leeks thin, wash and dry well and then store in resealable plastic bag.

Recipe FAQs

How can you add more flavor to potato leek soup?

Leeks and potato have great flavor already but if you want to add even more flavor, you can saute some garlic with the leeks, add smoked salt and top the potato leek soup with crumbled bacon or prosciutto.

How do you make the potato leek soup creamy?

Make sure the potatoes are completely cooked through and easily break apart with a fork. And for an ultra smooth and creamy potato soup, use a high powered blender to get the soup as smooth as possible.

What herbs can you add to potato leek soup?

Add finely minced chives or green onions to punch up the savory onion flavor as well as fresh thyme and finely chopped fresh parsley.

What can you serve with potato leek soup?

Serve the soup alongside Julia Child's salad nicoise or a savory puff pastry tart with chard.

More Soup Recipes to Try

  • Red and yellow beet soup with fresh dill.
    Red and Yellow Beet Soup
  • This easy homemade vegetable stock is made with leftover vegetable scraps including onion peels and herb stems.
    Homemade Vegetable Stock (From Scraps)
  • Recipe for zuppa toscana with potatoes, kale and sausage.
    Zuppa Toscana with Sausage
  • Tuscan bread soup aka ribollita is an Italian tomato soup with beans and thickened with bread.
    Tuscan Bread Soup (Ribollita)

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Julia Child's creamy potato leek soup with fresh thyme and olive oil on top.
Print Recipe
4.93 from 28 votes

Julia Child's Creamy Potato Leek Soup

This creamy potato leek soup is easy to make with just a handful of ingredients! Including sautéed leeks, creamy potatoes and a touch of cream that is blended until velvety smooth.
Nutritional Information and serving size is, (1) cup or 8 Ounces.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time35 minutes mins
Total Time45 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer, Lunch, Main, Soup
Cuisine: French
Keyword: creamy potato leek soup, Julia Child potato leek soup, Julia Child vichysoisse
Servings: 6 servings
Calories: 366kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Vitamix Blender

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons olive oil + more for garnish
  • 2 tablespoons unsalted butter
  • 1 pound Yukon gold potatoes peeled and chopped into ½ inch cubes
  • 2-3 medium leeks cut in half, sliced and cleaned well
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt to taste
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper + more for garnish
  • 5 cups vegetable stock
  • ½ cup heavy cream
  • Fresh thyme leaves removed from stem, for garnish
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Bring a medium pot to medium heat and add butter and olive oil. Once melted add the leeks and saute for 5-7 minutes until softened but not caramelized.
  • Add the cubed potatoes and season with salt and pepper.
  • Add enough stock to completely cover the vegetables. Cover with the lid, leaving a small opening and bring to a strong simmer.
  • Cook the potato leek soup until the potatoes are incredibly tender, about 35 minutes.
  • Once done, turn off the heat and use an immersion blender or high powdered blender to blend the soup until incredibly smooth.
  • Pour in the heavy cream and stir to mix in.
  • Ladle the soup into bowls and garnish with fresh thyme, a drizzle of olive oil and additional grating of black pepper and salt.

Video

Notes

  • Use only the light green and white parts of the leek. The very dark green are too fibrous and won't blend well. Save those to make a homemade stock!
  • Add enough stock not completely cover the vegetables. If theres not enough liquid, it could make the soup gummy.
  • Saute the leeks before adding the other ingredients to sweeten them.
  • Blend the soup while it's still warm so it blends easily and becomes creamy.
  • Leeks freeze very well! Slice the leeks thin, wash and dry well then store in resealable plastic bag.

Nutrition

Calories: 366kcal | Carbohydrates: 47g | Protein: 12g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 43mg | Sodium: 467mg | Potassium: 1025mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 2339IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 109mg | Iron: 4mg

Spinach Risotto with Parmesan

Apr 12, 2023 · 18 Comments

Creamy spinach risotto with lemon and parmesan.

This comforting spinach risotto is light, creamy and what spring dinners are made of! Full of savory flavors, including parmesan cheese, sauteed leeks and sweet peas, this creamy risotto is sure to impress!

Lemon spinach risotto with peas and parmesan.

May I introduce you to one my favorite spring recipes! A decadently bright and creamy spinach risotto featuring some of the seasons best ingredients, including tender peas and sauteed leeks.

Risotto is the perfect vessel to showcase seasonal flavors. During the fall, I love making butternut squash risotto and in the winter, a warm and comforting wild mushroom risotto that is fantastic alongside homemade caesar salad.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You'll Love This Recipe

  • Perfectly cooked spinach risotto that is never too thick or "gummy".
  • Bright spring flavors, including fresh lemon zest, spinach, leeks and peas, which inspired me to make Seasonally Spring Donabe.
  • Risotto is naturally gluten free making it a delicious main course option for many diets.

🧄 Ingredients

Ingredients for spinach risotto with lemon, peas and leeks.
  • Arborio rice: This style of rice has short and wide grains and more starch than other styles of rice. The extra starch is what makes risotto so decadent and creamy.
  • Vegetable Stock: Look for a low sodium vegetable stock to control the amount of salt added to the risotto recipe. We like Better than Bouillon.
  • Leeks: Only use the white and light green parts of the leeks. The very dark green part is too fibrous, so save that for homemade stock!
  • Garlic: Look for garlic bulbs with tight cloves, which means that the garlic is fresh.
  • Spinach: Fresh baby spinach is used in the spinach risotto and cooks quickly. If fresh spinach isn't available, substitute with ¼ cup of frozen and thawed spinach.
  • Peas: Frozen peas are easy to find, inexpensive and the best part, you don't have to thaw before adding them to the risotto!
  • Lemon: Both lemon zest and a squeeze of the lemon juice is used to brighten the leek risotto.
  • White Wine: Look for a dry white wine, such as Pinot Gris or Sauvignon Blanc.
  • Butter and Olive Oil: The olive oil is used to saute the leeks and garlic, but save the butter towards the end of cooking for a creamy finish.
  • Parmesan Cheese: If possible, look for a chunk of parmesan that you can grate yourself, which will have great nutty flavor. And the best part, save the rind and it add to bolognese sauce.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍋 Substitutions and Variations

  • Instead of spinach, add baby kale, chard leaves or even arugula!
  • If white wine isn't available just omit it and use the vegetable stock in the recipe.
  • For a dairy free version, substitute with vegan butter and omit the parmesan cheese.

⏲️ Instructions

Step 1: Slice the leeks and submerge them in a large bowl filled with water to remove any dirt. Then lift them out of the water and pat the leeks dry.

Step 2: In a large and wide pan, saute the leeks and garlic until soft but not browned on medium heat. When done add arborio rice and toss to coat.

Add vegetable stock to risotto and simmer until stock begins to reduce.

Step 3: Pour white wine into risotto and stir until absorbed. Next, add 1-2 ladlefuls of stock, at a time until rice absorbs all of the liquid.

Use a wooden spoon and pull the rice away to see how much the stock has reduced, then add another ladle of stock to the risotto.

Step 4: Use a wooden spoon to push the rice to the side and when most of the liquid is absorbed, add another 1-2 ladles of stock at a time. Continue for about 22-25 minutes until rice is tender.

Add fresh baby spinach to the risotto and stir until just wilted.

Step 5: Once the rice is done, stir in the lemon zest and spinach and gently toss to wilt the spinach.

Add grated parmesan and butter to the spinach risotto and stir together.

Step 4: Turn off heat and add 1 tablespoon of butter, peas and another ladle of stock. Stir the risotto with parmesan together until creamy.

Spinach risotto with sautéed leeks and peas.

Step 5: Ladle the spinach risotto onto plates and garnish with basil, a squeeze of lemon juice and additional grated Parmesan cheese, if desired.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Have some extra stock on hand because you may use all or less of the stock mentioned, depending how much your rice soaks up the liquid.
  • After about 20 minutes of cooking, continually taste the rice for doneness.
  • As the risotto sits, it will thicken. To loosen, add another ladle of stock and stir over low heat to warm through. 

Recipe FAQs

What is the best wine for risotto?

For a light spinach risotto, use a dry white wine, such as a Pinot Gris or Pinot Grigio or even a crisp Sauvignon Blanc, which are light and won't overpower the risotto ingredients.

What are some tips on making good risotto?

Always use arborio rice, which has a higher starch content and creates a creamier risotto. Another tip is to slowly add in the stock, one cup at a time so the rice has time to absorb the liquid slowly. And for a decadent and cheese risotto, add butter and grated parmesan cheese at the end of cooking.

Do you need to rinse arborio rice before making risotto?

Unlike other styles of rice, such as basmati rice, Arborio should not be rinsed before cooking. Arborio rice is thick and starchier than other styles of rice and rinsing it can wash some of that starch away.

What texture should risotto be?

Perfect risotto should "all'onda" in Italian or "flowing with a wave". Risotto should never be too "gummy" or thick, but when poured onto the plate, should flow nicely and spread evenly.

Recipes to Serve with Spinach Risotto

  • Garlic focaccia bread with herbs and honey.
    Roasted Garlic Focaccia
  • Homemade Caesar Salad Dressing
  • Italian Peppers and Onions
  • Recipe for amaretto tiramisu.
    Amaretto Tiramisu

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Creamy spinach risotto with lemon and parmesan.
Print Recipe
5 from 21 votes

Creamy Spinach Risotto with Parmesan

This comforting spinach risotto is light, creamy and what spring dinners are made of! Full of bright flavors, including fresh lemon zest, savory sautéed leeks, tender spinach and sweet peas.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Total Time40 minutes mins
Course: Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine: Italian
Keyword: leek risotto, lemon risotto, pea risotto, spinach risotto
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 486kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $15

Equipment

  • skillet
  • Microplane

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoons Olive oil
  • 2 leeks cleaned and sliced thin
  • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • 1 cup Arborio rice
  • 1 cup white wine Pinot Gris or Pinot Grigio
  • 6 cups low-sodium vegetable stock simmering
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon Ground black pepper
  • 1 tablespoon lemon zest
  • 1 cup fresh spinach
  • 1 cup frozen peas
  • 1 tablespoon butter
  • ½ cup grated Parmesan cheese + more for garnish
  • Lemon wedges for serving
  • Basil leaves roughly torn, for garnish
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • To clean the leeks, slice off the root end and slive the white and light green parts into thin strips. Then submerge the sliced leeks in a bowl of water so the dirt settles to the bottom. Lift the leeks from the water and pat them dry before cooking.
  • Bring a wide skillet over medium heat and drizzle with olive oil. Add the sliced leeks and saute for 3-5 minutes until softened. Add the garlic and continue sauteing for another minute.
  • Add the arborio rice and saute the rice into the oil so all of the grains are lightly coated with the oil.
  • Pour the white wine into the risotto and stir until the wine has absorbed. Then stir in 1-2 ladlefuls of stock, at a time and continue stirring until rice absorbs liquid, for about 22-25 minutes. Season with salt and pepper.
  • Once rice is tender, stir in lemon zest and spinach and gently toss until spinach is wilted.
  • Turn off heat and add 1 tablespoon of butter, the peas and another small ladle of stock and stir to combine. Stir in grated Parmesan cheese and taste for seasoning.
  • Ladle spinach risotto onto wide bowls and garnish with fresh basil and a squeeze of lemon juice and additional grating of Parmesan cheese, if desired.

Notes

  • You may use all or less of the stock mentioned, depending how much your rice soaks up the liquid. After about 20 minutes of cooking, continually taste the rice for doneness.
  • As the risotto sits, it will thicken, so loosen, add another ladle of stock and stir over low heat to warmed through. 

Nutrition

Calories: 486kcal | Carbohydrates: 60g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 18mg | Sodium: 659mg | Potassium: 629mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1920IU | Vitamin C: 24mg | Calcium: 181mg | Iron: 5mg

Slow Cooked Lamb Shawarma

Apr 9, 2023 · 15 Comments

Lamb shawarma roast served with pickled sumac onions and pita bread.

Slow cooked lamb shawarma is a mouthwatering Middle Eastern dish that bursts with bold flavors! The lamb marinated in a robust spice mixture with cumin, paprika and fresh herbs before cooking low and slow for hours until fragrant and incredibly tender. Serve lamb shawarma wrapped in pita or in a bowl with all the salads and toppings!

Lamb shawarma roast with sides and salads.

This homemade slow cooked lamb shawarma recipe will take you right back to the streets of Istanbul! Traditionally, you'll find large vertical spits of shawarma sliced thin and stuffed inside of pita bread with fresh additions such as spicy zhug and creamy tahini sauce. For a lemony bright Tahini sauce, try my Lemon Herb Tahini Sauce, It might be the most flavorful meal ever.

Instead, we're taking strong inspiration from bold Middle Eastern flavors and slow roasting a boneless leg of lamb for hours until fall-apart and incredibly tender. The results are mouthwatering, fragrant and tender lamb, sliced thin and served with a zesty and fresh zhug sauce.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You'll Love This Recipe

  • The shawarma marinade is full of bold Middle Eastern flavors with fresh herbs, bright lemon zest and robust spices!
  • Customizable: There are so many ways to serve lamb shawarma. Make a lamb shawarma wrap with homemade pita bread and a drizzle of creamy tahini sauce and zhoug. Or serve it like a falafel bowl with my fresh chopped salad and crumbled feta cheese.
  • Feeds a crowd! A 3 pound boneless lamb roast feeds up to 6 people. Then add all the additions, such as Turkish sumac onions, tzatziki sauce and a zesty tabbouleh salad, and you have yourself a delicious party!

🧄 What is zhoug?

Zhoug (also spelled "schug," "zhug," or "skhug") is a spicy Israeli condiment and is often called the "Israeli national chile paste".

It is made from a mixture of fresh hot peppers (usually green), fresh herbs, garlic, warm spices and olive oil and is blended in a food processor to create a thick paste. The flavors are fresh, spicy and slightly smoky coming from the cumin.

📋 Ingredients

Lamb Shawarma Ingredients

Ingredients for lamb shawarma.
  • Leg of Lamb: Look for a boneless leg of lamb that is butterflied. This is a technique where the bone is removed and the meat is laid flat. You can often ask your meat butcher to do this for you!
  • Fresh Herbs: Use a combination of parsley and cilantro or one or the other.
  • Spices: There are A LOT of spices in the shawarma mixture. It's ok if you don't have all the spices, use what you have or focus on using cumin, coriander and paprika.
  • Garlic: Look for firm cloves and give them a rough chop.
  • Olive Oil: Use a light olive oil or grapeseed oil for the marinade. Save the good extra virgin olive oil to drizzle over cherry tomato bruschetta.
  • Lemon: Both the zest and juice are used in the shawarma mixture. If lemon isn't available, substitute with orange, lime or red wine vinegar.

Zhoug Sauce Ingredients

Ingredients for zhug sauce, with cardamom, fresh herbs and jalapeño.
  • Fresh Herbs: A combination of fresh parsley and fresh cilantro are used in zhoug, but feel free to use all of one or the other. You can also include the stems for even more herbaceous flavor, just give them a rough chop before adding to the food processor.
  • Spices: Cumin and cardamom are both warm spices. Cardamom is fragrant and can be more pungent than cumin.
  • Jalapeño: For a spicier chili, use serrano or Fresno chili.
  • Garlic: Look for firm and fresh garlic cloves.
  • Olive Oil: Use a good quality extra virgin olive oil to compliment the other fresh ingredients.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🍊Substitutions and Variations

  • If you don't have all the spices available, focus on using cumin, coriander and paprika.
  • Substitute fresh lemon with orange or lime, both the zest and juice. If citrus is not available at all, add 2 tablespoons of red wine vinegar or white wine vinegar.
  • Use the same marinade on pistachio crusted rack of lamb.
  • Use all parsley or all cilantro for both the shawarma marinade and the zhoug sauce.
  • If using bone in leg of lamb, cut several small slits all over the lamb and press the marinate into the little pockets as you season the meat. Bone in lamb may take an extra 20-30 minutes of cooking time.
  • Slow cooker version: Instead of the oven, place the marinated and tied up lamb in the slow cooker and cook on low for 5-6 hours or on high for 3-4 hours.

⏲️ Instructions

Make the shawarma marinade. Add the spices, fresh herbs, garlic, olive oil and lemon zest and lemon juice to a food processor and blend until a smooth paste forms. (Photo 1 and Photo 2)

Blend the lamb shawarma marinade ina. food processor until a paste forms.

Season the lamb and marinate. Score through the fat layer and any thicker areas of muscle and rub the marinade all over the lamb and into any crevices (Photo 3). Then roll up the lamb with kitchen twine (Photo 4) to form a uniform shape. Marinate for at least 8 hours.

Rub the spice mixture all over the lamb, tie it up and marinate overnight.

Roast the lamb. Before roasting the lamb, remove it from the fridge 30 minutes before roasting. Then place the lamb in a dutch oven or roasting pan and roast at 325 degrees Fahrenheit for 1 hour. Add a cup of water to the bottom of the pan (Photo 5) and continue cooking for 2 ½ hours, basting every 30-45 minutes (Photo 6).

Add water to the lamb shawarma and baste as it slowly cooks.

Let the lamb rest. Once the lamb shawarma is done cooking, remove it from the oven and let it rest for at least 10 minutes before carving (Photo 7).

Roast the lamb shawarma for 3 hours.

🌶️ Make the Zhoug Sauce

While the lamb shawarma is cooking, make the zhug sauce.

Add the cilantro, parsley, chopped garlic, cardamom, cumin and olive oil to a food processor. Blend until a smooth paste forms and there are no large leaves. Transfer to a resealable container until ready to use.

Make an extra batch of zhug because you'll want to put it on top of everything! Chicken shawarma skewers, on top of Greek fries or swirled on top of Mediterranean hummus bowls for a creamy kick!

Zhug sauce is a spicy herb sauce with garlic, fresh herbs and warm spices.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Use paper towels to pat the meat dry on all of the sides before adding the shawarma marinade. This will help the mixture stick to the meat easily.
  • Remove the lamb from the refrigerator 30 minutes before cooking. This takes the "chill off" of the meat and helps the meat cook more evenly.
  • Marinate for at least 4 hours to overnight if you have the time. The longer, the more flavorful the lamb will be!
Lamb shawarma bowl with rice and pickled onions.

Recipe FAQs

Can slow cooked lamb shawarma be made ahead of time?

Yes, you can marinate the lamb overnight and up to 2 days in advance before cooking. You can also cook the shawarma ahead of time. When re-heating, place a sheet of foil over the lamb and and place in the oven until warmed through.

What is shawarma vs. gyro?

Shawarma comes from the Middle East where thin cuts of meat, such as lamb or chicken are layered onto a vertical spit and slowly cooked. Shawarma can be served with tahini sauce, salads and pickles. Gyro is from Greece and the meat is seasoned with herbs, including oregano. Lamb gyro is often served with tomatoes, onions and tzatziki sauce.

How do you serve lamb shawarma?

Stuff thin slices of lamb inside of pita bread and top with pickled sumac onions, zhug and drizzle of tahini sauce. You can also make a lamb shawarma plate with basmati rice and chopped salad.

Is lamb shawarma gluten free?

Yes, shawarma is traditionally made with gluten free ingredients, including spices, fresh herbs, garlic and citrus but make sure to read the spice bottles to be extra cautious.

What is butterfly lamb?

Butterfly lamb means that the bone is removed from a leg of lamb. The meat is opened up and laid flat. This technique makes the lamb easier to cook evenly as well as allowing more of the marinade to penetrate all of the meat. You can often ask your meat butcher to do this for you!

More Lamb Recipes to Try

  • Pistachio crusted lamb chops that are cut with a medium rare center.
    Pistachio Crusted Lamb Chops
  • Turkish Kofta Kebab (Grilled Beef and Lamb Skewers)
  • Turkish lahmacun with lamb and sumac onions.
    Lahmacun (Turkish Pizza)
  • Lebanese Hushwee with Tahini
    Lebanese Hushwee over Tahini

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Lamb shawarma roast served with pickled sumac onions and pita bread.
Print Recipe
5 from 14 votes

Slow Cooked Lamb Shawarma

Slow cooked lamb shawarma is a mouthwatering Middle Eastern dish that bursts with bold flavors! The lamb marinates in a robust spice mixture before cooking low and slow for hours until fragrant and incredibly tender.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time3 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
Marinate8 hours hrs
Total Time11 hours hrs 50 minutes mins
Course: Main
Cuisine: Middle Eastern
Keyword: homemade lamb shawarma, lamb shawarma, slow cooked lamb shawarma
Servings: 6 servings
Calories: 453kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Dutch Oven Braiser
  • Food Processor

Ingredients

Lamb Shawarma

  • 3 pound boneless leg of lamb butterflied
  • ½ cup fresh cilantro roughly chopped
  • ½ cup fresh parsley roughly chopped
  • 1 lemon zested and juiced
  • 4 garlic cloves roughly chopped
  • ½ cup olive oil or grapeseed oil
  • 1 tablespoon paprika
  • 1 tablespoon cumin
  • 1 tablespoon sumac
  • 1 ½ teaspoons Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon fennel seeds
  • ½ teaspoon ground cloves
  • ½ teaspoon cinnamon
  • ½ teaspoon cardamom
  • ¼ teasopoon ground nutmeg
  • 1 cup Water for basting

Zhoug

  • 1 cup fresh cilantro roughly chopped
  • 1 cup fresh parsley roughly chopped
  • 1 jalapeno
  • 2 garlic cloves roughly chopped
  • ½ teaspoon cumin
  • ½ teaspoon cardamom
  • ¼ teaspoon kosher salt
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • water as needed, to thin consistency

Additional Ingredients and Toppings

  • Pita bread
  • Israeli chopped salad
  • Sumac onions
  • Tahini Sauce
  • Pickled turnips
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

Lamb Shawarma

  • Make the shawarma marinade. Add the spices, fresh herbs, garlic, olive oil and lemon zest and lemon juice to a food processor and blend until a smooth paste forms.
  • Use paper towels to pat the lamb dry very well. Use a knife and score through the fat layer and any thicker areas of muscle and rub the marinade all over the lamb and into any crevices. Use kitchen twine to roll up the lamb into a uniform shape. Then place in the refrigerator and allow to marinate for at least 4 hours to overnight.
  • When ready to cook, pre-heat the oven to 325 degrees Fahrenheit and remove the lamb from the fridge 30 minutes before roasting.
  • Place the lamb in a dutch oven or roasting pan and roast 1 hour. Pour in 1 cup of water to the bottom of the pan and continue slow roasting for another 2-21/2 hours, basting with the pan juices every 30-45 minutes.
  • If the outside of the roast is getting too dark, cover the lamb with a sheet of foil for the last 30 minutes.
  • Once done, remove the lamb from the oven and let it rest for at least 10 minutes before slicing.

Zhoug Sauce

  • While the lamb shawarma is cooking, make the zhug sauce.
  • Add the cilantro, parsley, chopped garlic, jalapeño, cardamom, cumin and olive oil to a food processor. Blend until a smooth paste forms and there are no large leaves. Add water as needed if the mixture is too thick.
  • Transfer to a resealable container until ready to use.

Assemble the Shawarma

  • Slice shawarma into thin slices and serve as a wrap in a pita or bowl, topped with sumac onions, dollop of zhug and tahini sauce.

Notes

    • Use paper towels to pat the meat dry on all of the sides before adding the shawarma marinade. This will help the mixture stick to the meat easily.
    • If you don't have all the spices available, focus on using cumin, coriander and paprika.
    • Remove the lamb from the refrigerator 30 minutes before cooking. This takes the "chill off" of the meat and helps the meat cook more evenly.
    • Marinate for at least 4 hours to overnight if you have the time. The longer, the more flavorful the lamb will be!
    • Slow cooker version: Instead of the oven, place the marinated and tied up lamb in the slow cooker and cook on low for 5-6 hours or on high for 3-4 hours.
    • Recipe is inspired by Ottolenghi's lamb shawarma from his cookbook, Jerusalem with adjustments using ground spices, easier to find spices available near me and adjusting measurements.

Nutrition

Calories: 453kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 30g | Fat: 35g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 23g | Cholesterol: 91mg | Sodium: 788mg | Potassium: 578mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 1491IU | Vitamin C: 22mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 5mg

Arugula Pear Salad with Parmesan Vinaigrette

Apr 2, 2023 · 4 Comments

Arugula salad with shaved parmesan and chopped pear.

This fresh arugula pear salad features baby arugula, sweet pears and sliced fennel all dressed in a flavorful and tangy Parmesan vinaigrette. The combination of the peppery arugula, sweet pears, and tangy dressing creates a perfect balance of flavors that pairs well with any main course! And the best part, done in 10 minutes!

Arugula and pear salad with sliced fennel and shaved parmesan.

If you are looking for that perfect salad that goes with just about anything you will love this fresh arugula and pear salad! Arugula, pear and parmesan cheese are classic flavor combinations with layers of zesty flavors! Peppery, sweet, savory and tangy, this arugula pear salad has it all! To kick this wonderful Salad up a notch or two, Make my Puff Pastry Cheese Straws with Tapenade, this will be your new favorite addition to any salad.

Serve alongside creamy spinach risotto, one pot chicken with chickpeas or pistachio crusted lamb chops for an impressive meal!

For another Pear rich salad try my Chicken Schnitzel Salad.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Why You'll Love this Recipe

  • This salad is full of layers, flavors and textures!
  • You can make this arugula salad in under 10 minutes!
  • Make the arugula pear salad ahead of time and add the dressing later. Perfect to make ahead for a party or meal prep.
  • The parmesan dressing can also be used as a delicious marinade for roasted chicken!

🍐 Ingredients

Ingredients for arugula and pear salad, including fennel and slivered almonds.
  • Arugula: Look for baby arugula which will be more tender and have a more peppery flavor.
  • Pear: Red Anjou pears are used in this recipe, which are juicy, sweet and firm enough to hold up in a salad. Other pear varieties to add are green Anjou pear or bosc pear.
  • Fennel: When eaten raw, fennel has a slight licorice flavor with a similar texture to celery. Take the time to slice it very thin with a mandolin.
  • Parmesan: Invest in a chunk of Parmigiano Reggiano, which is aged and has great depth of flavor. Use a vegetable peeler to shave thin shavings on top of the pear salad and grate parmesan to add to the parmesan vinaigrette.
  • Slivered Almonds: Look for toasted or roasted almonds, which adds another layer of crunch and flavor to the arugula salad. Save some toasted almonds to make a batch of basil almond pesto.
  • Lemon: Fresh lemon zest and juice is used in the bright parmesan vinaigrette. Use a microplane to zest the lemon.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🧀 Substitutions and Variations

  • If arugula isn't available, substitute with baby spinach or baby kale.
  • Instead of parmesan, add crumbled goat cheese or crumbled blue cheese, such as creamy gorgonzola.
  • Apple and jicama are great substitutions for pear.
  • Instead of almonds, substitute with walnuts, pine nuts or pistachios.

⏲️ Instructions

Step 1: Make the Parmesan vinaigrette. To a resealable jar, pour in the olive oil, lemon zest and lemon juice and grated parmesan cheese. Shake well to emulsify

Add olive oil to a resealable jar and lemon zest and lemon juice.
Add the grated parmesan to the dressing and shake to combine and emulsify.

Step 2: To a large bowl, add the arugula, chopped pear, shaved fennel and toasted almonds.

Step 3: Pour the parmesan dressing over the salad and toss to combine. Garnish with shaved parmesan on top and serve.

Assemble arugula salad and pour the parmesan dressing over the salad.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Keep the arugula fresh by placing a sheet of paper towel directly on the arugula. This will trap any excess moisture, keeping the arugula leaves fresh and crisp!
  • Make a double batch of the parmesan vinaigrette and shake it in a resealable jar. Use what you need for the salad and store the rest in the jar for later use.
Arugula and fennel salad with shaved fennel, toasted almonds tossed with a parmesan vinaigrette.

Recipe FAQ's

How do you prevent pears from turning brown?

If cutting pears ahead of time for a salad, toss the cut pears in lemon juice, which will prevent the browning.

What pairs well with arugula?

Arugula is fresh and peppery and pairs with a number of ingredients such as parmesan cheese, blue cheese, pear and apples. Arugula is also great in making arugula pesto.

How do you prevent arugula from getting soggy?

After purchasing arugula, place a sheet of paper towel onto the arugula to catch excess moisture, which will keep the leaves crisp.

Can you make pear arugula salad ahead of time?

Yes, if making the salad ahead of time, toss the chopped pear in lemon juice to prevent browning. Then add the arugula, pear and other salad ingredients to a large bowl with a sheet of paper towel on top. Toss with vinaigrette right before serving.

More Salad Recipes to Try

  • Pearled couscous with colorful roasted vegetables.
    Israeli Couscous Salad with Roasted Vegetables
  • Serve the kale cranberry salad on a platter with crumbled feta cheese and apples.
    Kale Salad with Cranberries, Apples and Feta
  • Julia Child's Salad Nicoise
  • Grilled shrimp salad is fresh and hearty and full of spicy arugula, creamy avocado, thinly sliced fennel all dressed in a citrus vinaigrette.
    Grilled Shrimp Salad with Citrus and Fennel

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Arugula salad with shaved parmesan and chopped pear.
Print Recipe
5 from 10 votes

Arugula Pear Salad with Parmesan Vinaigrette

This pear and arugula salad is layered with crisp fennel, toasted almonds and dressed in a bright lemon parmesan vinaigrette.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Total Time10 minutes mins
Course: Salad
Cuisine: American
Keyword: arugula parmesan salad, arugula pear salad, pear and arugula salad with parmesan vinaigrette
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 512kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • Microplane

Ingredients

Arugula Pear Salad

  • 4 cups baby arugula
  • 1 red Anjou pear chopped into ½ inch cubes
  • 1 small fennel sliced thin
  • ½ cup slivered almonds
  • Shaved Parmesan

Parmesan Vinaigrette

  • ¾ cup olive oil
  • ¼ cup grated Parmesan cheese
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • 1 tablespoon fresh lemon juice
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Make the Parmesan Vinaigrette. Add the olive oil, grated parmesan cheese, lemon zest and juice and salt and pepper to a bowl and whisk to combine. Alternatively, add the ingredients to a mason jar and shake until emulsified.
  • Assemble the Salad. To a bowl, add the arugula, chopped pear, sliced fennel and toasted almonds and pour half of the vinaigrette over the salad.
  • Gently toss the salad together so all of the salad is lightly coated with the vinaigrette and add more dressing, if desired.
  • Garnish with shaved Parmesan cheese and serve immediately.

Video

Notes

  • Place a sheet of paper towel on the arugula as soon as you purchase it. This will collect any excess moisture and keep the leaves crisp. 
  • Parmesan vinaigrette can be made 3 days in advanced and kept in the refrigerator. 
  • Toss the chopped pear in lemon juice to prevent browning. 

Nutrition

Calories: 512kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 49g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 34g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 5mg | Sodium: 437mg | Potassium: 485mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 619IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 158mg | Iron: 2mg

Mango Lassi with Cardamom and Rose Water

Mar 24, 2023 · 7 Comments

Creamy mango lassi with cardamom and topped with shredded coconut.

Mango lassi is a delightful mango drink that is blended with coconut milk, warm cardamom and a hint of floral rose water.

Smooth and creamy mango lassi with cardamom and topped with shredded coconut.

🥭 What is Mango Lassi?

Creamy and slightly sweet, this coconut mango lassi is a delicious Indian yogurt drink that originated from the Indian subcontinent, Punjab.

There are all sorts of variations to a lassi, but the more popular ones I have seen are fruity mango lassis. This slightly sweet fruit version is blended with frozen mango, coconut milk and yogurt.

I added a touch of warm cardamom and a splash of floral rose water, which enhances the lovely fruit flavors.

🍹 Why You'll Love This Recipe

  • Creamy, smooth and perfectly sweet!
  • Perfect drink to enjoy on a warm summer day.
  • Uses easy to find ingredients, such as frozen mango, yogurt and coconut milk.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for mango lassi with rose water, cardamom and coconut milk.
  • Coconut Milk: Use a lite coconut milk so prevent the lassi from being too thick and too heavy.
  • Yogurt: Use a full fat yogurt for better flavor. If using the thicker Greek style of yogurt, you may need to add more coconut water to thin out the consistency.
  • Coconut Water: This adds additional flavor of coconut without overpowering. If coconut water is not available, substitute with regular water.
  • Mango: Traditionally, mango lassi is made with mango pulp, but you can also use frozen mango chunks or fresh mango.
  • Rose Water: I love use rose water in a number of Mediterranean recipes such as fruit tarts and Persian donuts. A little goes a long way so start small and add more if you like the floral flavor. If you don't like or have rosewater, just leave it out and the drink will still be incredibly delicious!
  • Cardamom: This is a warm spice that is used in both Mediterranean and Indian cuisine and adds a warm and aromatic note to the recipe. Start with a small amount of cardamom and add more if you like the flavor.
  • Honey: This is optional if you prefer a sweeter mango lassi. You can omit if the mango is sweet based on your preference.

🥥 Substitutions and Variations

  • Vegan Mango Lassi: Substitute the yogurt with coconut yogurt or another non-dairy yogurt and substitute sugar instead of honey.
  • Add a pinch of saffron for a floral flavor and golden color.
  • Make a lassi with other fruits such as strawberries or pineapple.

⏲️ How to Make a Mango Lassi

Making a creamy coconut mango lassi is easy, as long as you have a good blender to blend the lassi into a a smooth consistency.

  1. Add all of the mango lassi ingredients to a blender, along with some ice to make it extra cold and frothy
  2. Blend the lassi until incredibly smooth and there are no large pieces of fruit left.
  3. Pour the lassi into glasses and garnish with shredded coconut, if desired.

📍 Recipe Tip

When making any kind of blended drink or smoothie, always add the liquid to the blender first, before adding the heavier cubes of fruit. This will help the blender blend the drink easily and making a smooth drink.

Mango lassi with rose water and cardamom and topped with shredded coconut.
What does mango lassi taste like?

Mango lassi is creamy and slightly sweet coming from the mango and honey. The addition of cardamom gives the sweet yogurt drink a touch of warmth and complexity.

How long does mango lassi last?

You can make a mango lassi up to 24 hours in advance. As the drink sits, water may separate, altering the texture.

Is mango lassi vegan?

Not all mango lassi is made with vegan ingredients. Some lassis are made with cow milk and yogurt. You can make a mango lassi vegan by using non-dairy yogurts and milks and adding sugar instead of honey.

More Cool Drinks:

  • Jallab (Lebanese Drink with Date Molasses and Rose Water)
  • Chili-Lime Mango Margarita
  • Fruity and Floral Sephardic Inspired Sangria- Two Ways
Creamy mango lassi with cardamom and topped with shredded coconut.
Print Recipe
5 from 7 votes

Mango Lassi with Cardamom

Mango lassi is a delightful mango drink that is blended with coconut milk, warm cardamom and a hint of floral rose water.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Total Time10 minutes mins
Course: Drinks
Cuisine: Indian
Keyword: mango lassi, mango lassi with coconut
Servings: 2 servings
Calories: 200kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $5

Equipment

  • Vitamix Blender

Ingredients

  • 1 ½ cups frozen mango
  • ¾ cup yogurt
  • ½ cup light coconut milk
  • ¾ cup coconut water or regular water add more if
  • ¼ teaspoon cardamom
  • 1 teaspoon honey
  • ½ teaspoon rose water
  • Ice as needed
  • Shredded coconut for garnish
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Add the mango, yogurt, coconut milk and coconut water, cardamom, honey and rose water to a blender.
  • Add ice if desired and blend until smooth and there are no large fruit pieces left.
  • Pour the mango lassi into glasses and garnish with shredded coconut on top.

Video

Notes

  • For a vegan lassi, substitue the yogurt with coconut yogurt or another non-dairy yogurt. 
  • If using fresh mango or mango puree, add ice to make the lassi frothy. 
  • Lassi can be made up to 24 hours ahead of time. 
Adapted from Pineapple and Coconut

Nutrition

Calories: 200kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 12mg | Sodium: 180mg | Potassium: 580mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 1430IU | Vitamin C: 48mg | Calcium: 148mg | Iron: 1mg

Turkish Pide (Turkish Pizza) with 2 Different Fillings

Mar 22, 2023 · 23 Comments

Turkish pide with two different fillings of cheese and another with spiced ground beef, peppers and tomatoes.

Turkish Pide is a flavorful Turkish flatbread pizza that comes with various fillings that are layered with bold Mediterranean flavors! This pide recipe features two different filling options. One with a spiced ground beef mixture and another vegetarian option with melty cheese and a perfectly cooked egg right on top.

Turkish pide is a savory Turkish flatbread that is stuffed with different fillings, such as cheese and egg and another with ground beef, peppers and spices.

Pide is also known as Turkish pizza (not to be confused with another style of Turkish flatbread, called lahmacun). We saw pide all over the streets of Istanbul and were wowed with the bright colorful pictures of the long and oval shaped meat filled pies. Here is my recipe for a Pizza Sandwich.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🇹🇷 What is Pide?

Turkish pide is a delicious Turkish flatbread that is oblong in shape and filled with various fillings. You will see alls sorts of different pide all throughout Istanbul, along with other Turkish favorites, such as Turkish red lentil soup and boreka. Istanbul is truly a feast!

For this recipe, I am sharing two different filing options. One with a savory spiced meat mixture with green peppers, tomatoes and paprika. The other popular filing is a cheese pide that is stuffed with a combination of creamy ricotta cheese and feta.

Why You'll Love This Recipe

  • Authentic Turkish flavors of paprika, tomatoes and peppers.
  • This recipe offers two different filling options, both with striking flavors.
Turkish cheese pide with egg and another pide stuffed with ground beef.

🍅 Ingredients

Pide Dough Ingredients

  • Flour: A simple all purpose flour is all you need.
  • Yeast: Use active dry yeast for this recipe. Add the yeast to warm water with a bit of sugar, so the yeast can activate.
  • Egg: This gives the pide some fat and richness to the dough.
  • Yogurt: Use full fat yogurt for the best flavor. Yogurt is acidic and gives the dough a tender bite.

Meat Pide Ingredients

Anaheim pepper, onion and tomato are some of the ingredients that go into the meat mixture for the Turkish meat pide.
Ingredients for the meat pide are grated onion, chopped tomato and chopped Anaheim pepper.
  • Ground Beef: I like using a ration of 80/20 for maximum flavor. You can also substitute the ground beef with ground turkey or ground chicken.
  • Anaheim Peppers: These are long mild green peppers that are similar to the ones used in Turkey. If Anaheim peppers aren't available, substitute with a green bell pepper.
  • Tomato: Use a large vine ripened tomato that is a deep red color and fragrant for the best flavor.
  • Onion: Grated onion is a traditional ingredient in many Turkish recipes, such as grilled kofta that both flavors and moistens the mixture without having large pieces of onion to bite into.
  • Spices: Smoked paprika and Aleppo pepper are the spices used in the pide mixture. If you don't like the flavor of smoke, substitute with sweet paprika. Aleppo pepper is slightly sweeter than traditional red pepper flakes. If Aleppo pepper is not available, use half the amount of regular red pepper flakes.
  • Tomato Paste: In Turkey, red pepper paste is traditionally used but is harder to find in the states. Tomato paste is a good substitute which gives the meat mixture a sweet depth of flavor.
  • Egg: Whisked egg is used to drizzle over the meat filling and to brush onto the dough before baking.

Cheese Pide Ingredients

  • Ricotta Cheese: Look for a full fat ricotta cheese, which will have better flavor than low fat. Another tip is to look for a thick ricotta that is sold with a basket inside the package, which helps drain excess whey, making for a creamier ricotta cheese.
  • Feta Cheese: Buy a block of feta cheese in brine, which will be creamier than the pre-crumbled options.
  • Lemon Zest: This is a personal touch which gives the richer cheese a pop of brightness. Use a microplane to zest the very outside layer of the citrus peel.
  • Herbs: Fresh mint leaves and fresh thyme gives the cheese a bright fresh layer of flavor. You can also use ¼ teaspoon of dried thyme and dried mint, if fresh isn't available.
  • Egg: This is the time to use the small to medium sized eggs. Crack the egg into a bowl and then transfer it to the cheese pide. The whites may spill over if it's a larger egg.

Substitutions/Variations

  • Add mozzarella cheese to the cheese mixture or substitute with only mozzarella and feta cheese.
  • Instead of ground beef, use ground chicken, ground lamb or ground turkey.
  • Make a vegetarian pide with Mediterranean roasted vegetables or with sautéed spinach.
  • Instead of making the pide dough from scratch, use store bought pizza dough.

⏲️ How to Make Turkish Pide

Make the Pide Dough

  1. In a large boxing bowl, add the water salt, yeast and sugar. Mix lightly with a fork to get all the yeast in the water and allow to rest for about 10-12 minutes until the mixture begins to get foamy.
  2. Add the egg and yogurt and mix to incorporate well. Then using a dough attachment of a stand mixer, slowly mix in flour until a ball of dough forms.
  3. Transfer the dough onto a lightly floured surface and knead for a few minutes until the dough is smooth and not sticky.
  4. Place the dough in a bowl and cover lightly with a sheet of plastic wrap or towel and let the dough rise until it's doubled in size, for about 1-1 ½ hours.
  5. Once the dough has doubled in size, divide the dough into four equal portions and roll each to a smooth ball.
Add the yeast to warm water and allow to bloom before adding the dough ingredients.
Add the egg and yogurt mixture to the yeast mixture.
Place the dough in a clean bowl and let it rest and double in size.
Roll the pide dough on a lightly floured surface into a smooth ball.
Cut the dough into quarters and roll into a smooth ball.

Make the Meat Filling

  1. Bring a wide skillet over medium heat and add butter and olive oil.
  2. Once melted, add the ground meat and use a spatula to break the meat up and cook until the ground beef is halfway cooked through, about 5-7 minutes.
  3. Add the chopped green peppers and continue cooking cooking 2-3 minutes, until they begin to soften.
  4. Then add the chopped tomato, grated onion, smoked paprika, Aleppo pepper and tomato paste. Stir everything together and continue cooking on medium-high heat until the liquid evaporates and vegetables are soft.
  5. Season with salt and pepper and taste for seasoning. Remove from heat and allow to cool completely.
Cook the ground beef with butter until the beef is cooked through.
Add the chopped green peppers to the meat mixture and cook until the peppers are just tender.
Add the tomatoes and peppers to the spiced ground meat mixture and cook until the vegetables are softened.

Make the Cheese Filling

  1. To a bowl, add the ricotta cheese, crumbled feta, olive oil, chopped mint and thyme, lemon zest and salt and pepper.
  2. Stir the mixture together until everything is incorporated well and the mixture is thick and creamy. Taste for seasoning and adjust as needed.
  3. Set aside in the refrigerator until ready to assemble.
For the cheese pide, mix the ricotta cheese with feta and lemon zest in a bowl.

Assemble and Bake the Meat Pide

Roll out the dough into a nine inch long flatbread shape.
Spread the meat mixture onto the dough for the meat pide.
Place the meat pide on a baking sheet and garnish with sesame seeds before baking.
  1. Preheat the oven to 425 degrees Fahrenheit.
  2. Roll out each dough on a lightly floured surface to a about a 9 inch long oval and about an ⅛ inch thick (not too thin).
  3. Spoon the meat filling into two of the pide, leaving a border around the pide to fold over.
  4. Use your hands to shape the dough into a long oval shape, crimping the ends. Then gently place the pide onto a parchment lined baking sheet.
  5. Brush egg wash over the dough border and sprinkle with sesame seeds, if desired. Use a small spoon to drizzle a bit of egg mixture over the meat mixture. Bake for 18-20 minutes, or until the crust is golden brown.
Turkish pide with ground beef, spices, tomatoes and peppers.

Assemble and Bake the Cheese Pide

Roll out the dough into a nine inch long flatbread shape.
Spread the cheese mixture onto the dough before folding up the sides.
Fold up the sides of the dough to form an oblong shaped pide.
Brush the cheese pide with egg wash before baking.
Cook the cheese pide for a few minutes then top the cheese with an egg and finish cooking until the egg is cooked through.
  1. For the cheese pide, use a spoon to spread the cheese filling into the center of the dough, also leaving a border around the edge. Form the dough into a long oval shape and pinching the ends.Brush the border with egg wash and sprinkle with sesame seeds, if desired.
  2. Bake the cheese pide for 6-7 minutes, then remove from oven and use the back of a spoon to make a well in the center of the cheese mixture. Gently crack an egg and place it onto the cheese mixture and continue baking for another 8-10 minutes, until the crust is golden brown and egg is cooked.
  3. Once both pide are done, garnish with chopped herbs and a additional sumac, if desired.
Turkish pide is a oblong flatbread that is stuffed with various fillings, such as cheese and egg.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Make the meat filling and the cheese filling ahead of time up to 2 days in advance.
  • Make sure the filling is chilled and not hot when added onto the dough.
  • Crack the egg into a separate bowl first and then transfer to the cheese pide.

Recipe FAQs

How do you re-heat Turkish pide?

To re-heat pide, place the pide on a parchment lined baking sheet and bake in the oven until warmed through. You can also reheat pide on the stove top in a wide skillet that is drizzled with a bit of oil.

Do you have to cook the beef before filling the pide?

Yes, make sure to cook the beef or any other meat option before adding to the pide. Do not add uncooked meat, as it will take longer to cook the meat then the dough.

What can you use instead of beef for pide?

Instead of beef, substitute with ground turkey, ground chicken or ground lamb.

Can you make pide ahead of time?

Yes, you can make the pide dough up to a day in advance and place it in the refrigerator to rise. The fillings can be made up to 2 days in advance and chilled.

More Turkish Recipes to Try

  • Turkish sumac onion salad with fresh parsley, lemon juice and olive oil.
    Turkish Sumac Onions
  • Plate of homemade pistachio baklava doused in a honey syrup.
    Turkish Pistachio Baklava with Orange Blossom Syrup
  • Fasulye is a hearty green bean and tomato stew with cubed meat and served with rice.
    Fasulye (Turkish Green Bean Stew with Meat)
  • Turkish borek with spinach and feta filling that is cut into triangles.
    Turkish Borek (Spinach and Feta Pie)
Turkish pide with two different fillings of cheese and another one with ground beef.
Print Recipe
4.82 from 32 votes

Turkish Pide (Turkish Pizza with 2 Different Fillings)

Turkish Pide (aka pizza) is a Turkish comfort food favorite! Here are 2 different fillings, one with meat and peppers and the other with cheese and egg.
Prep Time1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Dough Rising1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
Total Time3 hours hrs 20 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: Mediterranean, Middle Eastern, Turkish
Keyword: pide recipe, Turkish flatbread, Turkish pide, Turkish pizza
Servings: 4 pide
Calories: 674kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $15

Equipment

  • Microplane
  • Rolling Pin
  • Nesting Bowls
  • Silpat

Ingredients

Pide Dough

  • ⅔ cups warm water
  • 2 cups flour + more for kneading
  • 1 teaspoon active dry yeast
  • ½ teaspoon sugar
  • 1 egg
  • ¼ cup full-fat Greek yogurt
  • Pinch of salt

Meat Filling

  • Olive oil for drizzling
  • 1 tablespoon unsalted butter
  • ½ pound ground beef
  • 2 Anaheim peppers chopped into ¼ inch pieces
  • 1 large tomato chopped into ¼ inch pieces
  • 1 small white or yellow onion grated (or chopped very finely)
  • 1 teaspoon smoked paprika
  • ½ teaspoon Aleppo pepper
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 Egg + water for egg wash whisked

Cheese Filling

  • 1 cup full fat ricotta cheese drained of excess moisture
  • ½ cup crumbled feta cheese
  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 teaspoon fresh thyme leaves chopped
  • 1-2 sprigs fresh mint leaves finely chopped
  • 1 tablespoon lemon zest
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 1 whole egg per pide smaller eggs if possible so whites don't pour over

Garnishes

  • Chopped parsley
  • Sesame seeds
  • Sumac
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

Make the Pide Dough

  • In a large boxing bowl, add the water salt, yeast and sugar. Mix lightly with a fork to get all the yeast in the water and allow to rest for about 10-12 minutes until the mixture begins to get foamy.
  • Add the egg and yogurt and mix to incorporate well. Then using a dough attachment of a stand mixer, slowly mix in flour until a ball of dough forms.
  • Transfer the dough onto a lightly floured surface and knead for a few minutes until the dough is smooth and not sticky.
  • Place the dough in a bowl and cover lightly with a sheet of plastic wrap or towel and let the dough rise until it's doubled in size, for about 1-1 ½ hours.
  • Once the dough has doubled in size, divide the dough into four equal portions and roll each to a smooth ball.

Make the Meat Filling

  • Bring a wide skillet over medium heat ad add butter and olive oil.
  • Once melted, add the ground meat and use a spatula to break the meat up and cook until the ground beef is halfway cooked through, about 5-7 minutes.
  • Add the chopped green peppers and continue cooking cooking 2-3 minutes, until they begin to soften.
  • Then add the chopped tomato, grated onion, smoked paprika, Aleppo pepper and tomato paste. Stir everything together and continue cooking on medium-high heat until the liquid evaporates and vegetables are soft.
  • Season with salt and pepper and taste for seasoning. Remove from heat and allow to cool completely.

Make the Cheese Filling

  • To a bowl, add the ricotta cheese, crumbled feta, olive oil, chopped mint and thyme, lemon zest and salt and pepper.
  • Stir the mixture together until everything is incorporated well and the mixture is thick and creamy. Taste for seasoning and adjust as needed.
  • Set aside in the refrigerator until ready to assemble.

Assemble and Bake the Pide

  • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Roll out each dough on a lightly floured surface to a about a 9 inch long oval and about an ⅛ inch thick (not too thin).
  • Spoon in the meat filling into two of the pide, leaving a border around the pide to fold over
  • Use your hands to shape the dough into a long oval shape, crimping the ends. Then gently place the pide onto a parchment lined baking sheet.
  • Brush egg wash over the dough border and sprinkle with sesame seeds, if desired. Use a small spoon to drizzle a bit of egg mixture over the meat mixture. Bake for 18-20 minutes, or until the crust is golden brown.
  • For the cheese pide, use a spoon to spread the cheese filling into the center of the dough, also leaving a border around the edge. Form the dough into a long oval shape and pinching the ends.Brush the border with egg wash and sprinkle with sesame seeds, if desired.
  • Bake the cheese pide for 6-7 minutes, then remove from oven and use the back of a spoon to make a well in the center of the cheese mixture. Gently crack an egg and place it onto the cheese mixture and continue baking for another 8-10 minutes, until the crust is golden brown and egg is cooked.
  • Once both pide are done, garnish with chopped herbs and a additional sumac, if desired.

Notes

  • Make the meat filling and the cheese filling ahead of time up to 2 days in advance.
  • Make sure the filling is chilled and not hot when added onto the dough.
  • Crack the egg into a separate bowl first and then transfer to the cheese pide.
  • Recipe yields 4 pide and about 8 servings
Dough recipe adapted from Saveur and Cheese mixture adapted from Ottolenghi.

Nutrition

Calories: 674kcal | Carbohydrates: 59g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 34g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 13g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 219mg | Sodium: 1104mg | Potassium: 572mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1354IU | Vitamin C: 13mg | Calcium: 291mg | Iron: 6mg

Turkish Pistachio Baklava with Orange Blossom Syrup

Mar 18, 2023 · 7 Comments

Plate of homemade pistachio baklava doused in a honey syrup.

A step by step guide on how to make Turkish pistachio baklava at home that is soaked in a a sweet and floral orange blossom simple syrup.

Homemade Turkish baklava with pistachios and orange syrup.

Homemade pistachio baklava is a sweet pastry made with layers of delicate phyllo dough, chopped pistachios and warm spices. Once the baklava is baked, a fragrant orange blossom syrup is poured over, which perfectly complements the nutty and crunchy baklava.

If you love the floral flavors of baklava, try my fruit tart with rose water and this shredded phyllo dessert called kanafe.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🇹🇷 Turkish Baklava and How to Eat It

Turkey is famous for their well beloved baklava and it wasn't until we visited Istanbul that we understood the true way to enjoy Turkish baklava.

There is an art to the way you eat baklava. Use a fork to stab your baklava, then promptly pick it up with the end facing up and take a generous bite.

As the fork enters the top layer of phyllo dough (or yufka, which is handmade all throughout Istanbul), listen for the initial "crunch" of the fork breaking through the crispy layers.

Different styles of baklava being served in Istanbul, Turkey.
Baklava in Istanbul.

🍑 Ingredients

  • Phyllo Dough: Also called filo dough, this is a very thin pastry that is stacked in layers. Phyllo can often be found in the frozen section of grocery stores near the puff pastry or pie crusts. If you have a Mediterranean market ear you, look for yufka, which has a more tender bite.
  • Pistachios: Use unsalted and shelled pistachios. If you do not like pistachios, substitute with chopped walnuts or chopped almonds.
  • Spices: Warm spices of cardamom and cinnamon are added to the nut mixture.
  • Melted Butter: Butter is a key ingredient in baklava that has to be brushed onto each phyllo layer. Use unsalted butter to control the amount of salt. Instead of butter, you can also use ghee.
  • Sugar: White sugar is used in making the simple syrup. Use double the amount of sugar to water and bring to a simmer to dissolve the sugar granules.
  • Orange Blossom Water: This is a floral infused water with a citrus aroma and almost perfumed aroma and flavor. A little goes a long way so start with a small measurement at first.
  • Aromatics: For the simply syrup, other aromatics are added including a cinnamon stick and lemon peel.

See recipe card for full information on ingredients and quantities.

🥜 Substitutions and Variations

  • Instead of orange blossom water, substitute with rose water for another floral flavor.
  • If the floral waters are not available, you can omit and make the simple syrup with cinnamon and lemon peel.
  • Instead of pistachios, substitute with chopped almonds or chopped walnuts or a combination of nuts.
Two squares of pistachio baklava are garnished with crushed pistachios on top.

⏲️ How to Make Homemade Baklava

  1. First make the simple syrup. Add all the ingredients to a small pot and bring to a gentle simmer until all the sugar is dissolved and it thickens slightly. When done, set aside to cool.
To make the simple syrup, add orange blossom water, a cinnamon stick and lemon peel to the sugar and water mixture.


2. Make the Pistachio Filling. In a food processor, add the pistachios, cardamom, cinnamon and lemon zest. Pule until the pistachios are finely ground but not too powdery. Set aside.

Chop the pistachios in a food processor so there are no large pieces left.


3. Layer the phyllo. Unroll the thawed phyllo dough and place a damp towel on top as you work with it. Brush a 9 x 13 baking pan with melted butter on all sides and layer two sheets of phyllo, then brush with butter and continue until half of the sheets are used.

4. Add the pistachios. Pour the pistachio mixture onto the phyllo and reserve a few tablespoons to garnish the top of the finished baklava. Spread out the pistachios in an even layer.

Layer half of the phyllo then top with crushed pistachios.

5. Continue layering two sheets of phyllo and brushing with the melted butter until all of the phyllo dough is used up. Once layered, brush the top with melted butter.

6. Cut the baklava into squares before baking. Use a sharp knife to cut the baklava into 24-26 squares.

Before cooking the baklava, cut the baklava into squares or triangles.
Brush the top of the pistachio baklava with melted butter.


7. Bake the pistachio baklava at 350 degrees Fahrenheit for about 22-25 minutes, until the top is golden brown and crisp.

8. Pour the syrup over the hot baklava. Once the baklava is cooked, remove it from oven and pour the orange blossom simple syrup all over the top, while the baklava is still hot.

Once the homemade baklava is cooked and golden brown, pour the simple syrup all over the top to soak in.

9. Allow the pistachio baklava to rest for at least 2-3 hours before serving so the baklava can soak up all of the syrup. Garnish the squares with the remaining ground pistachios.

Turkish baklava with pistachios and doused in an orange water simple syrup.

📍 Recipe Tip

Working with Phyllo Dough: Don't be intimidated with working with phyllo dough. Let the dough thaw in the fridge overnight and gently unroll.

As you work with the phyllo, keep a damp towel over the sheets so they don't dry out. And it's ok if the sheets tear, once it's baked, no one will notice.

Recipe FAQs

How do you store baklava?

Baklava can be stored at room temperature or in the refrigerator. Let baklava come to room temperature, then store in an air tight container to maintain freshness.

More Desserts to Try

  • Plum Cake with Vanilla and Cinnamon
  • Recipe for amaretto tiramisu.
    Amaretto Tiramisu
  • Burnt Basque Cheesecake inspired from the infamous La Viña in San Sebastian, Spain. Incredibly light and creamy with a deep caramel burnt top
    San Sebastian Cheesecake
  • Persian Doughnuts with Saffron and Rose Water (Bamieh)

Love this recipe? Please leave a 5-star 🌟🌟🌟🌟🌟rating in the recipe card below & a review in the comments section further down the page.

Plate of homemade pistachio baklava doused in a honey syrup.
Print Recipe
4.95 from 17 votes

Turkish Pistachio Baklava with Orange Blossom Simple Syrup

A step by step guide on how to make Turkish pistachio baklava at home that is soaked in an orange blossom simple syrup that is perfectly sweet and slightly floral.
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time30 minutes mins
Resting2 hours hrs
Total Time3 hours hrs
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: Middle Eastern, Turkish
Keyword: homemade baklava, pistachio baklava, Turkish baklava recipe
Servings: 34 squares
Calories: 150kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $15

Equipment

  • Food Processor
  • Microplane
  • Nesting Bowls

Ingredients

Simply Syrup

  • 2 cups sugar
  • 1 cup water
  • 1 tablespoon orange blossom water
  • 1 tablespoon honey
  • 1 cinnamon stick
  • 3 lemon peel strips Use your vegetable peeler to peel zest off lemon

Pistachio Baklava

  • 1 roll of phyllo dough thawed overnight (about 20 sheets)
  • 2 cups unsalted pistachios
  • 1 teaspoon cardamom
  • 1 teaspoon ground cinnamon
  • 1 teaspoon lemon zest
  • 12 tablespoons unsalted butter melted
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • First make the simple syrup. Add all the ingredients to a small pot and bring to a gentle simmer until all the sugar is dissolved and it thickens slightly, for about 5-8 minutes. When done, set aside to cool.
  • Make the Pistachio Filling. In a food processor, add the pistachios, cardamom, cinnamon and lemon zest. Pule until the pistachios are finely ground but not too powdery. Set aside.
  • Layer the phyllo. Unroll the thawed phyllo dough and place a damp towel on top as you work with it. Brush a 9 x 13 baking pan with melted butter on all sides and layer two sheets of phyllo, then brush with butter and continue until half of the sheets are used.
  • Add the pistachios. Pour the pistachio mixture onto the phyllo and reserve a few tablespoons to garnish the top of the finished baklava. Spread out the pistachios in an even layer.
  • Continue layering two sheets of phyllo and brushing with the melted butter until all of the phyllo dough is used up. Once layered, brush the top with melted butter.
  • Cut the baklava into squares before baking. Use a sharp knife to cut the baklava into 24-26 squares.
  • Bake the pistachio baklava at 350 degrees Fahrenheit for about 22-25 minutes, until the top is golden brown and crisp.
  • Pour the syrup over the hot baklava. Once the baklava is cooked, remove it from oven and pour the orange blossom simple syrup all over the top, while the baklava is still hot.
  • Allow the pistachio baklava to rest for at least 2-3 hours before serving so the baklava can soak up all of the syrup. Garnish the squares with the remaining ground pistachios.

Video

Notes

  • Thaw the phyllo overnight completely. It should not be frozen when ready to use. 
  • Keep a damp towel over the phyllo sheets as you work to keep them from drying. 
  • It's ok if the phyllo sheets crack or break, no one will notice after baking. 
  • There are about 20 sheets of phyllo per roll.

Nutrition

Calories: 150kcal | Carbohydrates: 19g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 11mg | Sodium: 42mg | Potassium: 83mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 143IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 13mg | Iron: 1mg

Baked Beet Chips with Creamy Labneh Dip

Mar 15, 2023 · 3 Comments

Red and yellow oven baked beet chips are served alongside a creamy lemon labneh dip.

Get ready for a flavor explosion with homemade baked beet chips! These colorful and flavorful oven baked beet chips offer a sweet and earthy taste with just a handful of ingredients. Serve the beet chips with a creamy labneh dip for the perfect bite!

Red and yellow baked beet chips are served alongside a creamy labneh dip that is garnished with cucumber and lemon zest.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Baked Beet Chips

If you're looking for a healthy and delicious Mediterranean snack, look no further than with these homemade oven baked beet chips! For another wonderful dip, try my Bread Dipping Oil with Fresh Herbs.

Thinly sliced beets are seasoned with a brush of olive oil, cumin and garlic and baked until just crisp.

Serve the oven baked beet chips with a tangy and creamy labneh dip (or tzatziki would be fabulous) for a delicious and refreshing bite!

Why You'll Love This Recipe

  • Baked beet chips are a great snack option that pair with a variety of dips, such as hummus and tzatziki.
  • Flavorings are easily customizable.
  • Beet chips are a healthier alternative than fried potato chips.

Ingredients

  • Fresh Beets: Baked beet chips are made with fresh beets. Cut off the leaves and stems (you can save the beet greens and fry them!) and slice the beets to an ⅛th of an inch thin using a mandolin. Use any color beets, such as yellow or red.
  • Spices: Garlic and cumin season the sliced beets. You can also use sumac, za'atar or simply salt and pepper.
  • Olive Oil: Brush a thin layer of olive oil onto the sliced beets before baking and save some as a garnish for the labneh dip.
  • Labneh: This is a strained yogurt cheese that is used in Mediterranean cuisine. Labneh is tangy, creamy and thick and can be used in a multitude of ways, such as spread onto a crostini for bruschetta or dolloped onto charred peaches for dessert. If labneh isn't available, substitute with full fat thick Greek yogurt.
  • Toppings: To make the labneh dip, top the labneh with crumbled feta cheese, chopped cucumber and fresh lemon zest.
Use a mandoline to slice fresh beets into thin slices for baking.

How to Make Baked Beet Chips

  1. Preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
  2. Wash and scrub the beets well and cut away the beet greens. *Tip: Leave a a few inches of the stem in tact to hold onto as a "guard" while you are slicing the beets.
  3. Using a mandolin, slice the beets into 1/16th inch thick slices and add the sliced beets to a wide bowl and sprinkle with salt. Let the beets sit for 10 minutes to release any moisture.
  4. Drain the beets and use a paper towel to blot excess moisture.
  5. Season the beets and drizzle with olive oil, cumin, garlic powder and pepper and mix to combine.
  6. Spread the sliced beets onto a parchment lined baking sheet in an even layer and bake for 30-35 minutes until the edges are crisp.

Make the Labneh Dip

  1. Add labneh to a bowl and mix in fresh lemon juice.
  2. Top the labneh with crumbled feta cheese, chopped cucumber, lemon zest, pinch of za'atar and a good drizzle of olive oil.
Colorful baked beet chips served with a creamy labneh dip.

Recipe Variations

  • Season the beets with a bit of cayenne for added spice.
  • For a sweeter flavor, season the beets with cinnamon.
  • Instead of labneh cheese, substitute with Greek yogurt.

Recipe Tips

  • If using yellow and red beets, keep the colors seperate so the red beets don't stain the lighter color beets.
  • Keep an eye on the beets as they bake, some thicker slices will take a few minutes longer to cook.
  • Keep the beet greens and use them as you would with spinach or kale!
  • Look for larger beets if you want larger chips because the beets will shrink as they bake.
Are beet chips healthy?

Beet chips are a delicious and healthy option compared to and are loaded with fiber, vitamin C and baked and not fried.

How do you keep beet chips from getting soggy?

Slice the fresh beets thin to keep them crisp when baking. Once baked, store the beets in an air tight container to keep them from getting soft.

More Mediterranean Snacks to Try

  • Creamy Avocado Hummus
  • Baked Za'atar Fries
  • Muhammara (Turkish Red Pepper and Walnut Dip)
  • Loaded Hummus
  • Greek Fries with Feta and Tzatziki
  • Easy Baked Feta Appetizer with Olives and Tomatoes

More wonderful beet recipes

  • Quinoa Salad with Roasted Beets, Blood Orange and Feta
  • Kale salad with roasted beets and citrus with orange segments off to the side.
    Winter Kale Salad with Radicchio and Roasted Beets
  • This will be your new favorite hummus! Sweet roasted beets and smoky cumin are added to homemade hummus creating the most stunning, vibrant and delicious creamy hummus.
    Roasted Beet Hummus
Red and yellow oven baked beet chips are served alongside a creamy lemon labneh dip.
Print Recipe
5 from 6 votes

Baked Beet Chips with Labneh

These colorful and flavorful oven baked beet chips offer a sweet and earthy taste with just a handful of ingredients. Serve the beet chips with a creamy labneh dip for the perfect bite!
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time35 minutes mins
Total Time45 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer, Mezze, Snack
Cuisine: Mediterranean
Keyword: baked beet chips, homemade beet chips, oven baked beet chips
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 90kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Equipment

  • Mandolin
  • Microplane
  • Nesting Bowls

Ingredients

Beet Chips

  • 3-4 medium sized beets red and/or yellow
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • 1 teaspoon cumin
  • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

Labneh Dip

  • 1 cup Labneh or Greek yogurt
  • 1 teaspoon fresh lemon juice
  • 1 small Persian cucumber finely chopped
  • ¼ cup Feta cheese crumbled, for garish
  • ½ teaspoon lemon zest
  • Olive oil for drizzling
  • ½ teaspoon Za'atar for garnish
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

Beet Chips

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • Wash and scrub the beets well and cut away the beet greens. *Tip: Leave a a few inches of the stem in tact to hold onto as a "guard" while you are slicing the beets. any stems or leaves.
  • Using a mandolin, slice the beets into 1/16th inch thick slices and add the sliced beets to a wide bowl and sprinkle with salt. Let the beets sit for 10 minutes to release any moisture.
  • Drain the beets and use a paper towel to blot excess moisture.
  • Season the beets and drizzle with olive oil, cumin, garlic powder and pepper and mix to combine.
  • Spread the sliced beets onto a parchment lined baking sheet in an even layer and bake for 30-35 minutes until the edges are crisp.

Make the Labneh Dip

  • Add labneh to a bowl and mix in fresh lemon juice.
  • Top the labneh with crumbled feta cheese, chopped cucumber, lemon zest, pinch of za'atar and a good drizzle of olive oil.

Notes

  • If using different color beets, keep the beets separate so the red doesn't stain the yellow beets.
  • Keep the beet greens and use the same way you would with spinach or kale. 
  • The thinner the slices are, the crispier the beets will be. 

Nutrition

Calories: 90kcal | Carbohydrates: 10g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.003g | Cholesterol: 11mg | Sodium: 465mg | Potassium: 321mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 89IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 123mg | Iron: 1mg

Spicy Korean Cucumber Salad

Mar 14, 2023 · 2 Comments

Asian cucumber salad seasoned with gochugaru, sesame seeds and soy sauce.

A staple in Korean dishes, this spicy Korean cucumber salad combines crisp cucumbers with a flavorful dressing made with gochugaru, sesame oil and rice vinegar. The result is a refreshing and spicy side dish that's perfect for adding some fresh crunch to any meal.

Korean cucumber salad is seasoned with sesame seeds, gochugaru and soy sauce.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🌶️ Korean Cucumber Salad

If you're looking for a delicious and refreshing side dish, let me introduce you to Korean cucumber salad, also known as oi muchim.

Often served as banchan, this simple and spicy cucumber salad features chunks of crisp cucumbers that are tossed in a flavorful dressing made with gochugaru, nutty sesame oil, soy sauce and other aromatics.

The results are spicy, savory and refreshing that pairs well with a variety of other dishes, such as chicken katsu and kalbi ribs.

👨‍🍳 Why You'll Love this Recipe

  • Comes together within minutes!
  • Layers of flavor, including salty, spicy, refreshing and slightly sweet.
  • Easy to double or triple the recipe.

🥒 Spicy Cucumber Salad Ingredients

Ingredients for spicy Korean cucumber salad, including Korean red pepper, soy sauce and sesame oil.
  • Cucumbers: Look for long English cucumbers or Persian cucumbers that have a thin peel and less seeds.
  • Gochugaru: Is a medium heat dried red pepper that is used in kimchi. You can find this in most Asian markets and online as well.
  • Soy Sauce: I like using shoyu, which is a Japanese style of soy sauce that has a mild and slightly sweet flavor.
  • Sesame Oil: Look for toasted sesame oil for added depth.
  • Rice Vinegar: This gives the cucumber salad a layer of acidity and sweetness.
  • Sugar: Sugar is added to balance out the savory and salty flavors.
Bag of Korean red pepper also called gochugaru.

⏲️ How to Make Korean Cucumber Salad

  1. To a medium sized bowl, add the gochugaru, soy sauce, sesame oil, sesame seeds, rice vinegar and sugar and whisk to combine.
  2. Chop the cucumbers into ½ inch chunks and add them to the bowl.
  3. Give the cucumbers a toss in the dressing, making sure the dressing is evenly coated on all of the cucumbers.
  4. Taste for seasoning and adjust as needed. You can also add sliced green onions if available.
  5. Let the cucumber salad marinate for 10 minutes, then serve.

📍 Recipe Tip

Don't add salt just yet! Salt will draw the moisture out of the cucumbers as the salad sits. Taste for seasoning after the salad is assembled, and add more salt if desired.

🧄 Recipe Variations

  • Add sliced green onion or thinly sliced sweet onion.
  • Slice the cucumbers into very thin slices instead of chunks.
  • Add finely chopped garlic for a sharper flavor.
  • Add fresh grated ginger.
How long will Korean cucumber salad last?

You can make the cucumber salad up to 2 days in advance. As it sits, some moisture will release but the cucumbers will stay mostly crunchy.

Do you need to peel cucumbers for the cucumber salad

If you are using long English cucumbers, Asian cucumbers or Persian cucumbers, you do not have to peel them because the cucumbers have a thin and tender peel.

Serving Suggestions

  • Vietnamese rice noodle salad with grilled lemongrass chicken.
    Rice Noodle Salad with Grilled Chicken
  • Classic loco moco with hamburger patty, white rice and decadent mushroom gravy.
    Loco Moco with Mushroom Gravy
  • Hawaiian plate lunch with kalua pork, rice and mac salad.
    Hawaiian Plate Lunch
  • Furikake ahi recipe served with rice and green onions.
    Seared Furikake Ahi
  • Hoisin Pulled Pork Sliders
  • Pajeon (Korean Scallion Pancake)
Asian cucumber salad seasoned with gochugaru, sesame seeds and soy sauce.
Print Recipe
5 from 6 votes

Spicy Korean Cucumber Salad

Spicy Korean cucumber salad combines crisp cucumbers with a flavorful dressing made with gochugaru and other aromatics that is delicious and refreshing!
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Marinate10 minutes mins
Total Time15 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer, Side Dish
Cuisine: Asian, Korean
Keyword: Asian cucumber salad, Korean cucumber salad, spicy cucumber salad
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 35kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $5

Equipment

  • Nesting Bowls

Ingredients

  • 4 Persian cucumbers ends removed and cut into ½ inch chunks
  • 1 tablespoon gochugaru
  • 1 tablespoon sesame seeds
  • 3 teaspoons soy sauce
  • ½ teaspoons sesame oil
  • 1 teaspoon rice vinegar
  • ½ teaspoon sugar
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • To a medium sized bowl, add the gochugaru, soy sauce, sesame oil, sesame seeds, rice vinegar and sugar and whisk to combine.
  • Add the chopped cucumbers to the same bowl and toss in the dressing, making sure the dressing evenly coats all of the cucumbers.
  • Taste for seasoning and adjust as needed. You can also add sliced green onions, if available.
  • Let the cucumber salad marinate for 10 minutes, then serve.

Notes

  • Cucumber salad can be made ahead up to 2 days in advance. 
  • Hold off on salting until after you taste the salad for seasoning. 
  • If your cucumbers have a lot of seeds, cut in half lengthwise and remove the seeds with a spoon. 

Nutrition

Calories: 35kcal | Carbohydrates: 4g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 2g | Saturated Fat: 0.3g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 286mg | Potassium: 140mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 652IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 36mg | Iron: 1mg

Israeli Couscous Salad with Roasted Vegetables

Mar 8, 2023 · 12 Comments

Pearled couscous with colorful roasted vegetables.

Full of vibrant colors and layers of flavors, this simple recipe for Israeli couscous salad with roasted vegetables is warm and satisfying. Serve the warm Mediterranean couscous salad alongside your favorite protein or alone as a vegetarian main course.

Israeli couscous with colorful roasted vegetables, including roasted zucchini, cherry tomatoes and bell peppers.

If you are looking for a flavorful and colorful side dish, let me introduce you to this zesty and warm Israeli couscous salad with roasted vegetables. This Mediterranean couscous salad is full of bright colors and tender pearl couscous that soak up the flavorful balsamic vinaigrette beautifully.

Serve this Israeli couscous recipe on it's own as a vegetarian main course or alongside grilled Mediterranean salmon, salmon shawarma or shish tawook.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍅 Why You'll Love This Recipe

  • Loads of colorful vegetables that go with a variety of other dishes!
  • Versatile! Roast any combination of vegetables, such as cherry tomatoes or roasted cauliflower.
  • Enjoy at any temperature! Serve the couscous salad hot right, warm or even as a cold.

🍚 What is Israeli Couscous?

Israeli couscous, also known as pearl couscous, is a type of small, round pasta that is made from semolina flour and is similar in texture to barley or farro.

Pearl couscous is a staple in Middle Eastern cuisine and is often used as a base for salads, stews, or served as a side dish, such as with charred salmon and fava beans. You can often find Israeli couscous in the bulk section of grocery stores or in the same aisle as pasta or rice.

🫑 Ingredients

Ingredients for pearl couscous with roasted vegetables, including cherry tomatoes, zucchini and bell peppers.
  • Israeli Couscous: Also called pearl couscous, Israeli couscous comes from the pasta family and is made from semolina flour. Pearl couscous are small and round and when cooked, plump up and become soft and slightly chewy.
  • Vegetables: Use a variety of vegetables that cook at the same time. For this recipe, there are grape tomatoes, zucchini, bell peppers and red onion.
  • Vegetable Stock: A flavorful vegetable stock gives the couscous another layer of flavor. You can also use water or chicken stock.
  • Balsamic Vinaigrette: Whisk olive oil, balsamic vinegar, Dijon mustard and lemon juice together. The warm couscous will soak up the dressing nicely.
  • Fresh Herbs: Garnish with aromatic fresh herbs such as fresh basil or fresh mint or both.

⏲️ How to Make Israeli Couscous Salad

  1. Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit and add the vegetables to a baking sheet.
  2. Drizzle the vegetables with olive oil and season with salt and pepper and chopped garlic. Give the vegetables a toss so everything is coated evenly and roast the vegetables for 40-45 minutes until tender.
  3. While the vegetables are cooking, make the Israeli couscous. Place a small pot over medium heat and drizzle with olive oil. Add the couscous and toast for 5-8 minutes, stirring until the pearl couscous is lightly golden brown.
  4. Pour in the vegetable stock and bring up to a boil, then down to a simmer and cook the couscous for 20 minutes, until the couscous is tender and liquid has soaked up.
  5. Make the vinaigrette by whisking the olive oil, balsamic, dijon and lemon juice together until combined.
  6. Once everything is done, combine the cooked pearl couscous and the roasted vegetables in a large bowl and drizzle with vinaigrette and toss to combine.
  7. Garnish with fresh basil and serve warm or at room temperature.
Roasted vegetables on a baking sheet, including cherry tomatoes, cubed zucchini, red onion and bell peppers.

📍 Recipe Tip

Take the time to toast the Israeli couscous on low-medium heat, while continuously stirring so all of the kernels are evenly toasted and lightly browned. Toasting the Israeli couscous gives it a nutty flavor.

🌶️ Variations

  • Add other vegetables such as roasted cauliflower, cubed eggplant, asparagus or butternut squash.
  • Add more protein with the addition of cooked chickpeas or white beans.
  • Make it spicy and garnish with harissa or Aleppo pepper.
  • Garnish the couscous salad with crumbled feta cheese or goat cheese.
Can you overcook Israeli couscous?

Yes, you can overcook Israeli couscous. Pearl couscous only takes 20 minutes to cook. Once the liquid has soaked in and couscous is tender, it's ready.

What is the difference between couscous and Israeli couscous?

Both couscous and Israeli couscous are made from semolina flour. The main difference is their shape and texture. Couscous is fine and fluffy and Israeli couscous is plump with a slightly chewy texture.

Serving Suggestions

  • Chicken Shawarma Skewers
  • Spatchcock Chicken with Lemon Herb Butter
  • Herb and Citrus Roasted Salmon
  • Cedar Plank Salmon
  • Grilled Branzino with Lemon and Herbs

More Couscous Recipes

  • A simple recipe for lemon herb couscous that takes nearly 15 minutes and is a fantastic side to other Mediterranean dishes.
    Lemon Herb Couscous
  • Lemony Couscous Salad with Chickpeas and Asparagus
  • Charred Salmon with Lemon Herb Israeli Couscous and Fava Beans
  • One pot chicken with saffron pearl couscous and zucchini.
    One Pot Israeli Couscous with Chicken
Pearled couscous with colorful roasted vegetables.
Print Recipe
5 from 19 votes

Israeli Couscous with Roasted Vegetables

This warm Israeli couscous salad is full of colorful roasted vegetables and dressed in a tangy vinaigrette. Serve as a side dish or on it's own as a vegetarian main course.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time40 minutes mins
Total Time50 minutes mins
Course: Dinner
Cuisine: Mediterranean
Keyword: Israeli couscous salad, Israeli couscous with vegetables, pearl couscous with vegetable
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 611kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Equipment

  • Nesting Bowls
  • Microplane

Ingredients

Israeli Couscous

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 cup Israeli couscous
  • 1 ¾ cups vegetable stock or chicken stock or water

Roasted Vegetables

  • 2 medium zucchini chopped into ½ inch cubes
  • 1 pint cherry tomatoes large ones, cut in half
  • 1 small red onion cut into ½ inch chunks
  • 2 red or orange bell peppers cut into ½ inch chunks
  • 3 garlic cloves finely chopped or grated
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 3 tablespoons olive oil

Balsamic Vinaigrette

  • ½ cup olive oil
  • 3 tablespoons balsamic vinegar aged or reduced balsamic, if available
  • 1 teaspoon Dijon mustard
  • 1 teaspoon lemon juice
  • Salt and pepper to taste
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit and add the vegetables to a baking sheet.
  • Drizzle the vegetables with olive oil and season with salt and pepper and chopped garlic. Give the vegetables a toss so everything is coated evenly and roast the vegetables for 40-45 minutes until tender.
  • While the vegetables are cooking, make the Israeli couscous. Place a small pot over medium heat and drizzle with olive oil. Add the couscous and toast for 5-8 minutes, stirring until the pearl couscous is lightly golden brown.
  • Pour in the vegetable stock and bring up to a boil, then down to a simmer and cook the couscous for 20 minutes, until the couscous is tender and liquid has soaked up.
  • Make the vinaigrette by whisking the olive oil, balsamic, dijon and lemon juice together until combined.
  • Once everything is done, combine the cooked pearl couscous and the roasted vegetables in a large bowl and drizzle with vinaigrette and toss to combine.
  • Garnish with fresh basil and serve warm.

Video

Notes

  • Toast the Israeli couscous for a few minutes until lightly toasted. This gives a slightly nutty depth of flavor. 
  • Use any variety of vegetables you have or enjoy, just keep in mind that they should all roast at the same time. 
  • Pour the vinaigrette over the couscous while the couscous is still warm, so all of the flavors can soak in. 

Nutrition

Calories: 611kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 42g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 30g | Sodium: 1039mg | Potassium: 786mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 12g | Vitamin A: 2860IU | Vitamin C: 124mg | Calcium: 62mg | Iron: 2mg

Fasulye (Turkish Green Bean Stew with Meat)

Feb 25, 2023 · 9 Comments

Fasulye is a hearty green bean and tomato stew with cubed meat and served with rice.

A true family heirloom, fasulye is a Turkish green bean stew with meat that is simple and comforting. Simmered in tomato broth, we like to serve fasulye with basmati or jasmine rice.

Serve fasulye, a Turkish meat and green bean stew with a side of rice to soak up the delicious tomato broth.

There are a few favorite recipes I gravitate towards when I am craving something from my childhood. One is this hearty and simple Turkish green bean stew, my mom's stuffed grape leaves and perfectly crisp latkes.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥣 A Little Family Story about Fasulye

This Turkish green bean stew is dear to my childhood and to my stomach. Called fasulye, it is based off of my Mom’s Sephardic side of the family and is truly and family gem.

My mother learned to make this recipe from her Great-Grandmother and all the women in our family have a certain twist to their fasulye.

I would often hear stories about how my mom, her sister, Aunt Clara and Grandma and Great-Grandma would all sit on the floor with large bowls of green beans snapping each end of every single one. If there was still a string left, Mom’s Grandma spotted it.

🥩 What is Fasulye?

Fasulye translates to beans in Turkish, which can be from fresh green beans, like in this recipe or kuru fasulye which has white beans.

The Turkish stew usually has a tomato base, with either tomato paste or chopped tomatoes with cubes of beef or lamb. There are also vegetarian versions of fasulye with sauteed green beans and tomatoes.

📋 Ingredients

Turkish fasulye is simple and heart-warming and the ingredients are uncomplicated, yet the flavors are pronounced. The combination of tomato with the green beans creates a distinct flavor only this pairing can illustrate.

  • Beef Stew Meat: Look for chuck for this beef stew and if cutting the meat yourself, cut the beef into 1 inch cubes.
  • Onion: Yellow or white onion, diced.
  • Tomato Paste: This gives a deep tomato flavor to the stew. When adding, sauté the tomato paste in the oil so all the flavors open up.
  • Chopped Tomatoes: If tomatoes are in season, use fresh tomatoes for the best flavor but a small can of chopped tomatoes works very well.
  • Water or Stock: I like using a stock base which gives great flavor.
  • Green Beans: Fresh or frozen green beans work well for fasulye. If using fresh, trim the ends off.

⏲️ How to Make Fasulye

  1. Pat the cubed beef dry with paper towels and season with salt and pepper.
  2. Bring a Dutch oven to medium high heat and drizzle with olive oil. Once hot, sear the beef cubes, in batches until caramelized on all sides.
  3. Remove the beef to a plate and sauté the chopped onions until softened, for 2-3 minutes.
  4. Stir the tomato paste in sauté for another minute until deepened in color. Then pour in ½ cup water and deglaze, scraping up any meaty bits from the bottom of the Dutch oven.
  5. Add the beef cubes back in and pour the stock and chopped tomatoes in and simmer for 10 minutes.
  6. Place green beans on top of the stew, making sure they are not submerged so the green beans steam and not overcook.
  7. Cover the Dutch oven, leaving a small opening and bring to a simmer. Cook the beef stew for 1-1 ½ hours, until the meat is tender and green beans are just cooked through.
  8. Serve fasule with white rice, spooning the sauce over the rice and garnish with chopped parsley.
Dry the beef cubes well with paper towels and season with salt and pepper.
Sear the beef cubes until caramelized on all sides.
Add chopped onions and saute until softened.
Add a few tablespoons of tomato paste and saute.
Add water and deglaze the bottom of the pan, scraping up any meaty bits from the bottom.
Add the fresh green beans right on top of the beef stew.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Dry the beef very well with paper towels so the meat sears nicely.
  • Use frozen green beans or tender haricot verts to make this recipe even easier!
  • Place the green beans right on top of the stew and don't submerge them in the liquid. This will ensure the green beans don't overcook.
Turkish green bean stew with meat and tomatoes.

🌶️ Variations

  • Substitute with cubes of lamb instead of beef.
  • Make fasulye vegetarian and omit the beef. Instead, add cubes of potatoes and white beans.
  • For a spicier flavor, add 1 teaspoon of Aleppo pepper or harissa paste.
What cut of beef is stew meat?

For beef stew, use chuck which can handle the longer cooking and will become tender. Cut the chuck roast into medium sized 1 inch cubes for beef stew.

How to Serve Turkish Green Beans

We serve fasulye simple with either basmati rice or jasmine rice. Be sure to scoop some of the delicious tomato sauce over the rice! You can also top with a dollop of yogurt or labneh and fresh chopped parsley.

More Turkish Recipes to Try

  • Summer Fasulye
  • Turkish Zucchini Pie
  • Turkish Borek (Spinach and Feta Pie)
  • Lahmacun (Turkish Pizza)
  • Baklava Bimuelos
Fasulye is a hearty green bean and tomato stew with cubed meat and served with rice.
Print Recipe
5 from 13 votes

Fasulye (Turkish Green Beans with Meat)

A true family heirloom, fasulye is a Turkish green bean stew with meat that is simple and comforting. Simmered in tomato broth, we like to serve fasulye with basmati or jasmine rice.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 40 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: Mediterranean, Middle Eastern, Turkish
Keyword: fasulye, Turkish green bean stew with meat, Turkish green beans recipe, Turkish green beans with meat
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 484kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $15

Equipment

  • Dutch Oven

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds beef stew meat cut into 1 inch cubes
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 1 small yellow onion diced
  • 3 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 2 ½ cups stock or water chicken stock or beef stock
  • 15 ounce can diced tomatoes
  • 1 pound green beans ends trimmed
  • chopped parsley for garnish
  • Cooked Jasmine rice for serving
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Pat the cubed beef dry with paper towels and season with salt and pepper.
  • Bring a Dutch oven to medium high heat and drizzle with olive oil. Once hot, sear the beef cubes, in batches until caramelized on all sides.
  • Remove the beef to a plate and sauté the chopped onions until softened, for 2-3 minutes.
  • Stir the tomato paste in sauté for another minute until deepened in color. Then pour in ½ cup water or stick and deglaze, scraping up any meaty bits from the bottom of the Dutch oven.
  • Add the beef cubes back in and pour in the rest of the water or stock and chopped tomatoes. Stir together and simmer the stew for 10 minutes.
  • Place green beans on top of the stew, making sure they lay on top and not submerged so the green beans steam and not overcook.
  • Cover the Dutch oven,, leaving a small opening and bring everything to a simmer and cook the beef stew for 1-1 ½ hours, until the meat is tender and green beans are just cooked through.
  • Once done, serve fasule with white rice, spooning the sauce over the rice and garnish with chopped parsley.

Notes

  • This recipe can easily be made in the slow cooker, with the same directions.
  • Use frozen green beans instead of fresh. There is no need to thaw. 
  • This recipe tastes even better the next day and is great for making ahead!

Nutrition

Calories: 484kcal | Carbohydrates: 20g | Protein: 57g | Fat: 19g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 141mg | Sodium: 1019mg | Potassium: 1305mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 1393IU | Vitamin C: 20mg | Calcium: 135mg | Iron: 7mg

Creamy Avocado Hummus with Za'atar

Feb 21, 2023 · 7 Comments

Creamy avocado hummus garnished with olive oil, za'atar and fresh herbs.

This creamy avocado hummus starts with the classic homemade hummus recipe and made even creamier with the addition of ripe avocado. Add a generous sprinkle of za'atar and sumac on top for a pop of zesty flavor!

Creamy avocado hummus recipe topped with olive oil and za'atar.

There is nothing more delicious than a well made homemade hummus and once you have the base recipe, the variations are endless!I like adding roasted beets and making a slightly sweet roasted beet hummus or in this case, perfectly ripe avocado! For another wonderful dip, try my Bread Dipping Oil with Fresh Herbs.

The ripe avocado is added to the hummus base, along with creamy tahini , chickpeas, warm spices and fresh lemon juice. The avocado not only gives the hummus a lovely subtle green hue, but makes the most velvety and smooth homemade hummus.

The next time you're making homemade hummus, add some avocado in while you're at it and get dipping!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥙 Why You'll Love this Recipe

  • Avocado hummus is a vegan recipe made with whole, plant based ingredients.
  • The ripe avocado makes the hummus ultra creamy and light!
  • This easy avocado hummus is highly customizable and the perfect recipe to make hummus bowls with or loaded hummus with any of your favorite toppings!

🍋 Ingredients

Ingredients for avocado hummus including tahini, lemon and garlic.
  • Chickpeas: Canned chickpeas make this recipe incredibly easy. If you have the time, remove the peels from the chickpeas to make the hummus even creamier.
  • Tahini: Tahini is a sesame seed paste that has a deep nutty flavor. You can often find tahini in most grocery stores in the same aisle as the peanut butter.
  • Avocado: Look for a ripe avocado for this hummus recipe. A good trick to see if your avocado is ripe, is to gently remove the stem from the avocado. If it's bright green and removes easily, it's ready.
  • Olive Oil: A little olive oil is added when mixing the hummus as well as a drizzle, for garnish.
  • Lemon: Fresh lemon juice is added to the hummus mixture, which also prevents the avocado from turning brown too quickly.
  • Garlic: Only 1 medium sized garlic clove is al you need for this hummus recipe. You could add another, but don't let the garlic overpower the other ingredients.
  • Spices: Paprika is added to the hummus mixture for a touch of warmth. For garnish, za'atar and sumac are added which gives the avocado hummus a bright and earthy layer of flavor.

🥑 How to Make Avocado Hummus

  1. Drain and rinse garbanzo beans. Remove the outer shell of each bean with your fingers and discard shell. Add to a food processor.
  2. Along with the garbanzo beans, add the flesh of the avocado, tahini, lemon juice, garlic, paprika, salt, cayenne (if using) and a drizzle of olive oil. Pour in a few tablespoons of ice cold water and pulse together until everything is well combined.
  3. Layer the avocado hummus on a wide plate, making a small well in the center with the back of a spoon. Garnish with a drizzle of olive oil and sprinkle of za'atar, sumac and chopped parsley.
Creamy avocado hummus recipe served with toasted pita bread.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • For ultra creamy hummus, remove the peels from each chickpea.
  • Add a few tablespoons of ice cold water to the hummus. The cold water works with the tahini to make it creamy.
How long can you keep avocado hummus in the fridge?

Homemade hummus is more delicate than store bought hummus and will last up to 5 days in the fridge.

How do you make hummus creamy?

To make your homemade hummus creamy, remove the peels from the cooked chickpeas and add ice cold water to the hummus mixture. The ice cold water works with the tahini to make the hummus velvety smooth.

🍢 What to Serve with Avocado Hummus

  • Homemade Pita Bread that is warmed up.
  • Spread a layer of avocado hummus on the bottom of chicken shawarma bowls.
  • Serve with skewers of shish tawook on top.
  • Top the hummus with homemade falafel.
  • Add avocado hummus to a Mediterranean mezze board instead of classic hummus.
Creamy avocado hummus garnished with olive oil, za'atar and fresh herbs.
Print Recipe
5 from 7 votes

Creamy Avocado Hummus with Za’atar

This creamy avocado hummus is made even creamier with the addition of ripe avocado making the homemade hummus velvety smooth!
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Total Time15 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer, Mezze, Snack
Cuisine: Mediterranean
Keyword: avocado hummus, creamy avocado hummus
Servings: 6 servings
Calories: 236kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $5

Equipment

  • Food Processor

Ingredients

  • 15 ounce canned chickpeas peels removed
  • ½ cup tahini
  • 1 ripe avocado
  • 1 garlic clove roughly chopped
  • 1-2 tablespoons lemon juice
  • ¼ cup ice cold water
  • ¼ teaspoon paprika
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • Pinch of cayenne optional, for heat

Garnish

  • Olive oil
  • Sumac
  • Za'atar
  • Chopped parsley
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Drain and rinse the canned garbanzo beans. Remove the outer shell of each bean with your fingers and discard shell, then add to a food processor.
  • Along with the garbanzo beans, add the flesh of the avocado, tahini, lemon juice, chopped garlic, paprika, salt and cayenne if using, and a drizzle of olive oil. Pour in a few tablespoons of ice cold water and pulse together until everything is well combined.
  • Layer the avocado hummus on a wide plate, making a small well in the center with the back of a spoon. Garnish the hummus with a drizzle of olive oil and sprinkle za'atar, sumac and chopped parsley.

Video

Notes

  • Add half the amount of cold water at first and add more if the mixture is too thick. 
  • Taste for seasoning and adjust as needed, more lemon juice? More cayenne?
  • Avocado hummus will last in the fridge for up to 5 days.

Nutrition

Calories: 236kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Sodium: 207mg | Potassium: 363mg | Fiber: 6g | Sugar: 0.3g | Vitamin A: 114IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 59mg | Iron: 2mg

Chicken Tikka Masala

Feb 19, 2023 · Leave a Comment

Creamy chicken tikka masala recipe in a creamy spiced coconut and tomato sauce.

This easy chicken tikka masala is the perfect recipe for when you are craving bold and strong flavors on a weeknight! Tender pieces of chicken thighs marinated in yogurt and ginger and then simmered in a flavorful creamy tomato curry with coconut milk. Make sure to have extra naan on hand to sop up the delicious sauce!

Garnish this easy chicken tikka masala recipe with a drizzle of coconut milk and chopped herbs. Serve with naan and basmati rice.

This easy chicken tikka masala recipe is full of bold flavors and easy enough to make on a standard weeknight. Chicken thighs are marinated in yogurt and ginger then simmered in a rich creamy tomato and coconut milk curry. For another wonderful Chicken meal, try my One Pot Chicken Provencal.

The results are savory and rich, this dish begs to be dipped into with some naan. I highly recommend serving with a chilled glass of mango lassi and fragrant basmati rice to sop up the luscious sauce. My favorite basmati rice is from India Gate.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥘 What is Chicken Tikka Masala?

Chicken tikka masala is a curry dish with marinated and cooked pieces of chicken that are simmered in a rich tomato based sauce. The word tikka means pieces, and masala is the flavorings, or the sauce.

As popular as chicken tikka masala is here in the U.S. and Britain, it is not nearly as popular in India. The dish has Indian influences through its spices but was actually created in the United Kingdom in the 1950's.

The story is said that a British General was dining at an eatery and complained that the chicken was too dry. The Indian chef scrambled around the kitchen and simply poured some tomato soup and spices over the chicken and ta-dah, chicken tikka masala was born! And since, has become one of Britain’s most popular dishes.

📋 Ingredients

Ingredients for chicken tikka masala with coconut milk.
  • Chicken Thighs: Boneless and skinless chicken thighs is ideal for chicken tikka masala. Chicken thighs have more fat making the meat more tender compared to chicken breast.
  • Plain Yogurt: Yogurt tenderizes the chicken and gives it a great tangy flavor. Use a plan yogurt without any added flavors. Either Greek style yogurt or regular yogurt will work.
  • Aromatics: Shallots, ginger and garlic are used in the sauce. The ginger and garlic is also used in the yogurt mixture to marinate the chicken.
  • Chopped Tomatoes: To keep this recipe even easier, use canned chopped tomatoes and for added smoky flavor, use fire-roasted chopped tomatoes.
  • Tomato Paste: I like using tomato paste that comes in a tube when you only need a few tablespoons. Saute the tomato paste into the oil to give the whole dish a touch of sweetness.
  • Spices: Turmeric, paprika and garam masala are the spices used to make the tikka masala so flavorful. A pinch of cayenne is optional but adds a nice touch of heat.
  • Coconut Milk: Instead of heavy cream, which is traditionally used in garam masala, coconut milk is added. Look for full fat coconut milk which will have more fat and flavor than lite coconut milk.
  • Sugar: Adding sugar is optional but as you taste the sauce, you may want to add a touch of sugar to bring out the sweetness of the other ingredients. Use a teaspoon of brown sugar or white sugar.

⏲️ How to Make Easy Chicken Masala

Marinate and Cook the Chicken

  1. Add the chicken thighs to a bowl along with yogurt, ginger, garlic and garam masala and mix to combine so all of the chicken pieces are evenly coated. Marinate while you prep the other ingredients or for at least 30 minutes.
  2. Bring a wide skillet over medium-high heat and sear the chicken pieces until golden brown on both sides, then set aside.
Marinate the chicken thigh pieces in yogurt, garlic and ginger.
Sear the yogurt marinated chicken pieces in a skillet.
Cook the chicken pieces until deeply browned on all sides.

Make the Masala Sauce

  1. In the same skillet, saute the chopped shallots, ginger and garlic until fragrant.
  2. Add the tomato paste and spices and saute for another minutes.
  3. Add the chopped tomatoes and water and mix to combine. Simmer for 5-10 minutes and taste for seasoning. Add sugar is you prefer more sweetness.
  4. Pour in the coconut milk and sir to combine. Then add the cooked chicken back in and stir so all of the chicken is coated with the sauce.
  5. Continue simmering for another 2-3 minutes then remove from the heat.
  6. Garnish the tikka masala with chopped herbs and serve with cooked basmati rice and naan.
Saute chopped garlic, shallots and ginger until fragrant.
Saute the turmeric and garam masala spices into the oil.
Simmer the chopped tomatoes and water in the masala spices so the flavors come together.
Add coconut milk to the masala sauce and stir to combine.
Once you add the coconut milk to the masala sauce, simmer for 5 minutes so the flavors come together.
Add the cooked chicken to the creamy coconut masala sauce.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • If you have the time, marinate the chicken overnight, the longer, the better!
  • Use Greek yogurt to keep the mixture thick and creamy.
  • Look for whole coconut milk, which is thicker and creamier than lite coconut milk.
Serve easy chicken tikka masala with basmati rice in a bowl.

🌶️ Substitutions and Variations

  • For added heat, add chopped serrano to the shallot and ginger saute.
  • Use crushed tomatoes for a smooth sauce instead of chopped tomatoes.
  • Fire roasted tomatoes offer a smoky favor but if you prefer more sweet, use regular canned chopped tomatoes.
  • Skinless, boneless chicken breast can be used instead of thighs, but I would recommend marinating for as long as you have to tenderize the leaner meat.
  • For a vegetarian tikka masala, use chickpeas, spinach and chopped zucchini.
Can you make chicken tikka masala ahead of time?

Yes, you can make the entire recipe up to 3 days ahead of time and will taste even better the next day.

What do you serve with chicken tikka masala?

Serve chicken masala with cooked basmati rice and naan or roti.

More Indian Recipes to Try

  • Mango Rose Lassi
  • Aloo Gobi (Spiced Cauliflower and Potatoes)
  • Red Lentil Coconut Curry

Creamy chicken tikka masala recipe in a creamy spiced coconut and tomato sauce.
Print Recipe
5 from 5 votes

Easy Chicken Tikka Masala

This easy chicken tikka masala recipe is full of bold flavors in a rich and creamy coconut tomato curry and perfect to make on a weeknight!
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time20 minutes mins
Marinate30 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 5 minutes mins
Course: Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine: British, Indian
Keyword: chicken tikka masala recipe, chicken tikka masala with coconut milk, easy chicken tikka masala
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 462kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Equipment

  • skillet
  • Nesting Bowls
  • Microplane

Ingredients

Chicken Marinade

  • 2 pounds boneless skinless chicken thighs cut into 1 inch pieces
  • ½ cup plain yogurt
  • 1 tablespoon grated ginger
  • 2 cloves garlic grated or finely chopped
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • 1 teaspoon garam masala
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper

Masala Sauce

  • 2 tablespoons avocado oil or ghee
  • 1 small shallot finely chopped
  • 4 cloves garlic finely chopped or grated
  • 1 inch piece of ginger grated or finely chopped
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 2 teaspoons sweet paprika
  • 1 teaspoon garam masala
  • 1 teaspoon turmeric
  • ¼ teaspoon cayenne optional for added heat
  • 14 ounce canned chopped tomato fire-roasted for added smokiness
  • 1 ½ cups water
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper
  • 2 teaspoons brown sugar optional, for additional sweetness
  • ½ cup full-fat coconut milk or heavy cream + more for garnish
  • Fresh cilantro leaves or parsley chopped, for garnish

For serving

  • Naan
  • Basmati rice
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

Marinate the Chicken

  • Add the chicken thighs to a bowl along with yogurt, ginger, garlic, lemon juice and garam masala, salt and pepepr and mix to combine so all of the chicken pieces are evenly coated.
  • Marinate the chicken while you prep the other ingredients or for at least 30 minutes.
  • Bring a wide skillet over medium-high heat and sear the chicken pieces until golden brown on both sides. Once fully cooked through, remove and set aside.

Make the Masala Sauce

  • In the same skillet, sauté the chopped shallots, ginger and garlic until fragrant.
  • Add the tomato paste and spices and sauté for another minute to break up the tomato paste.
  • Add the chopped tomatoes and water and season with salt and pepper. Stir everything together and simmer for 5-10 minutes and taste for seasoning. Add sugar if you prefer the sauce to have more sweetness.
  • Pour in the coconut milk and stir to combine. Then add the cooked chicken back into the sauce and stir so all of the chicken is coated with the sauce.
  • Continue simmering for another 2-3 minutes, then remove from the heat.
  • Garnish the tikka masala with an extra drizzle of coconut milk and top with chopped herbs. Serve with cooked basmati rice and naan.

Video

Notes

  • Saute chopped serrano for added heat along with the shallots.
  • This is a great recipe to make ahead and tastes even better the next day!
  • If you have the time, marinate the chicken overnight. 
  • Recipe adapted from Food Network

Nutrition

Calories: 462kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 47g | Fat: 24g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.04g | Cholesterol: 219mg | Sodium: 1015mg | Potassium: 1034mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 870IU | Vitamin C: 15mg | Calcium: 117mg | Iron: 5mg

What to Serve with Falafel (20 + Ideas!)

Feb 17, 2023 · 2 Comments

Fried falafel balls served in a bowl with chopped salad and hummus.

There is nothing like perfectly fried falafel that are crisp on the outside and tender in the middle. Falafel are fantastic on it's own, but it's also fun to serve falafel alongside other additions! Here are over 20 ideas on what to serve with falafel, including dips and spreads, salads and more! And here is a full Printable list of Mediterranean Spices for your Pantry.

Fried falafel balls served in a bowl with chopped salad and hummus.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🥙 What are Falafel?

Falafel are vegan fried balls made with dried chickpeas. The first falafel are said to have been made from fava beans that originated in Egypt. However, the more well known falafel are made with dried chickpeas that are soaked and processed into a crumbled texture and mixed with onion, garlic and lots of fresh herbs.

For a step by step tutorial, check out my Homemade Falafel Recipe!

⏲️ Falafel Making Tips

  • The best falafel are made with dried chickpeas. Canned chickpeas are much too soft for falafel.
  • Falafel are versatile when it comes to flavors! Use different herbs such as mint and dill and different spices such as turmeric for a deep yellow hue.
  • When frying falafel, don't overcrowd the pan, which will bring the oil temperature down.
  • Fry falafel on the first side until you see golden brown edges on the bottom, then flip over.
  • Drain falafel on a wire rack so the falafel stay crisp.

🥗 How to Serve falafel?

  • Serve falafel in a collard wrap for a low-carb option.
  • Fry black bean falafel and top them with a bright heirloom tomato salsa for a Tex-Mex twist.
  • Make a falafel bowl and add all your favorite salads, dips and grains!
  • Serve green falafel on top of hummus with toasted pine nuts and olive oil.
  • Add fried falafel to a colorful vegetarian falafel platter for a diy dinner night!

🧄 What to Eat with Falafel

Creamy Homemade Hummus

Serve fried falafel on top of homemade hummus! This classic version is made easily with canned chickpeas, creamy tahini and warm spices to give the hummus a depth of flavor.

Tahini Sauce

Tahini sauce is the sauce to drizzle on just about anything! Homemade tahini sauce is creamy and savory and a great addition to drizzle on top of falafel, roasted vegetables or even a simple salad. Add harissa to make your tahini sacue spicy or extra herbs for a green tahini sauce.

Homemade Pita Bread

There is nothing like the soft pillowy feel of homemade pita bread! Open the pita bread pocket and stuff falafel balls to make a falafel pita, along with pickled turnips, chopped salad and a drizzle of tahini sauce.

Heirloom Tomato Fattoush Salad

Traditionally, fattoush salad is a Lebanese style of salad with toasted pita chips and vegetables. This version has chunks of heirloom tomatoes and loads of fresh herbs.

Israeli Chopped Salad

Israeli chopped salad is a colorful salad mixed with diced cucumbers and tomatoes and dressed in a bright lemon and olive oil dressing. Serve this chopped salad in falafel bowls or as a fresh side salad.

Homemade Tzatziki Sauce (with Pita Chips)

Cool and creamy, tzatziki sauce is a very popular Greek dip that is easy to make. Tzatziki is made with yogurt, garlic, fresh lemon juice and fresh herbs and is a perfect condiment to dip fried falafel balls into.

Turkish Red Pepper and Walnut Dip (Muhammara)

Muhammara is a tangy and flavorful Turkish dip made with walnuts, roasted peppers and pomegranate molasses. Muhammara is great on it's own and delicious with fried falafel dipped into as well.

Vegetarian Stuffed Grape Leaves

If you are looking for delicious mezze to serve with falafel, add vegetarian grape leaves to the mix! This flavorful stuffed grape leaves are filled with basmati rice, chickpeas and loads of fresh herbs.

Greek Quinoa Salad with Chickpeas and Lemon Vinaigrette

If you are looking for a filling and colorful salad to serve with your falafel, you will love this Greek quinoa salad with chickpeas! Plus, this is a great salad to make ahead!

Turkish Sumac Onions

These Turkish sumac onions are te perfect condiment to add to your fried falafel or grilled meats if you are looking for a vibrant pop and crunch. Thinly sliced red onions are dressed with tangy sumac, bright lemon juice and fresh herbs and comes together within minutes.

Greek Rice Pilaf with Orzo

This Greek rice pilaf is a great side dish to serve with any Mediterranean main course and would be perfect in a falafel bowl or falafel platter1 Orzo and basmati rice are cooked with toasted nuts, fresh lemon and loads of fresh herbs.

Loaded Hummus

Up the flavors and textures of classic hummus and make this colorful hummus! Top your hummus with chopped salad, chopped olive, crumbled feta cheese and toasted pine nuts. Serve with fried falafel on the side or simply serve falafel right on top of the layered hummus.

Chopped Kale and Chickpea Salad with Creamy Tahini Dressing

This simpel kale salad is one of my favorites to serve with homemade falafel. Massaged kale is tossed with chickpeas and tomatoes and dressed in the creamiest tahini salad dressing.

Smoky Zucchini Baba Ghanoush

Baba ghanoush is traditionally made with roasted or grilled eggplant where the smoky eggplant flesh is mixed with tahini, garlic and spices creating an intensely flavored dip. Instead, this version uses zucchini in place of the eggplant and is a great accompaniment for fried falafel.

Roasted Beet Hummus

Beets not only offer a gorgeous eye popping color to hummus but a touch of sweetness as well. Serve green falafel on top of deep red hummus for an eye popping and delicious bite!

Lebanese Style Tabbouleh Salad

Tabbouleh salad is a traditional Lebanese salad with bulgur and finely chopped parsley adn mint. Some versions, like this also have diced cucumbers and tomatoes that give the salad a pop of brightness.

Kale Tabbouleh with Pomegranate and Quinoa

Not exactly traditional, this kale tabbouleh salad takes inspiration from the herb salad and uses finely shredded kale that is dressed with pomegranate seeds, quinoa and a tangy pomegranate dressing.

Baked Beet Chips with Labneh

A snack on it's own, baked beet chips become crisp and savory, making them a delicious item for dipping. The tangy labneh dip is made with labneh cheese, fresh lemon and salty feta cheese.

Greek Fries with Feta and Tzatziki

If you are looking for a side dish to serve alongside a falafel pita or something for a mezze, you will love these Greek fries with Feta! The seasoned potatoes are faked until crisp and garnished with a bright lemon vinaigrette and creamy tzatziki sauce.

Lemon Orzo Salad with Corn and Basil

This lemon orzo salad is fresh, flavorful and easy to make! Cooked orzo is tossed with sweet corn, basil adn crumbled feta cheese and is a great salad to make ahead of time! This would be great in a falafel platter with tzatziki sauce and chopped salad.

Mediterranean Roasted Vegetables

Cauliflower, cherry tomatoes and eggplant are generoulsy seasoned wiht a bold blend of Mediterranean spices, including za'atar and paprika. If you are looking to up the flavors in weeknight roasted veggies, you will love these Mediterranean roasted vegetables!

Over 20 ideas on what to serve falafel with.

Turkish Borek (Spinach and Feta Pie)

Feb 16, 2023 · 10 Comments

Turkish borek with spinach and feta filling that is cut into triangles.

Turkish borek is a staple in Turkish cuisine! These savory pastries are filled with a mixture of spinach, feta and herbs that are layered with a tender buttery glaze.

Turkish borek with spinach and feta filling.

Turkish borek is a staple in Turkish cuisine. Thin sheets of phyllo are glazed with a melted butter and milk mixture and filled with a savory layer of spinach and feta cheese. For another great Feta dish, try my Phyllo Feta Rolls with Honey.

Borek can be compared to the Greek spanakopita, but in my humble opinion, I prefer the texture of borek. The addition of milk and egg in the melted glaze mixture gives the spinach pie a much more tender bite.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🌿 What is Borek?

Boreks aka boreka are Turkish savory pastries with various fillings, such as with spinach and feta or simple made as cheese borek as well as borek stuffed with eggplant.

Traditionally, you'll find borek made with a dough called yufka, which is more pliable than phyllo. When we visited Istanbul we saw woman sitting and rolling sheets and sheets of yufka. Of course it is much more difficult to find yufka here in the states, though phyllo works just as well.

📋 Ingredients

  • Phyllo Sheets: Phyllo also spelled fillo can be found in the frozen section in most grocery stores. Phyllo is paper thin and needs to be thawed overnight in the refrigerator or at room temperature for at least 1 hour. If you can find the more traditional yufka at Mediterranean specialty stores, use that.
  • Frozen Spinach: Thaw the frozen spinach and squeeze of any excess moisture so there is not any moisture weighing down the borek.
  • Feta Cheese: Feta cheese is a sheep's milk cheese that is creamy and tangy. Look for feta cheese that is sold as a block of cheese in brine, which will be much more creamier than the pre-crumbled options.
  • Fresh Herbs: Lots of fresh parsley and dill are added to the spinach and feta mixture. Remove any large stems and roughly chop the leaves.
  • Eggs: This is one of the ingredients that gives more richness to this borek recipe. The eggs are added to the melted butter glaze as well as to the spinach mixture to help bind.
  • Melted Butter: Use unsalted butter since feta cheese can be salty. The melted butter is part of the glaze that is brushed onto the phyllo sheets.
  • Milk: Whole or part skim milk is another ingredient that adds richness and a better mouth feel to the borek recipe. Milk is added to the glaze mixture that is brushed onto the phyllo sheets.
  • Olive Oil: In addition to the milk and egg, olive oil is also added to the glaze mixture.

⏲️ How to Make Turkish Borek

  1. In a large bowl, add the thawed spinach, crumbled feta cheese, fresh herbs, 1 egg and season with salt and pepper. Stir to combine well.
  2. In the 2nd bowl, add the glaze ingredients. Whisk the melted butter, milk, olive oil and egg until well combined. And in the 3rd bowl, add the topping glaze ingredients and whisk the milk and egg.
  3. Unroll phyllo sheets and cover with a damp towel to keep it from drying. If your box of phyllo has 2 rolls of phyllo, just use 1.
  4. Brush a 9 by 13 pan with the butter glaze mixture on all sides and bottom.
  5. Layer the first phyllo sheet into the pan and brush with glaze. Continue this for 10 layers or about half of the phyllo sheets.
  6. Add the spinach and feta filling and distribute evenly. Then top with another sheet of phyllo and continue layering a phyllo sheet, then brushing with glaze until all the sheets are used up.
  7. Once all the phyllo sheets are used, brush with the topping glaze and use a sharp knife to cut the borek into 12 squares or 24 triangles.
  8. Bake the spinach borek at 350 degrees Fahrenheit for 40-45 minutes or until the top is golden brown.
Unroll the thawed phyllo sheets.
Cover the phyllo sheets with a damp towel to keep the phyllo from drying out.
Brush a 9 by 13 pan with melted butter glaze before layering phyllo.
Brish the phyllo sheets with the melted butter glaze.
Add the spinach and feta mixture onto the phyllo sheets and spread into an even layer.
After the Turkish borek is layered, cut the borek into squares or triangles.

Substitutions and Variations

  • Make Cheese borek with mozzarella and feta cheese.
  • Instead of spinach, make borek with kale or chard.
  • After adding the topping glaze, garnish the borek with sesame seeds for added texture.

📍 Recipe Tips

  • Phyllo must be thawed before making the recipe. Thaw the phyllo in the fridge overnight or at room temperature for at least 1 hour.
  • Each roll of phyllo is about 20 sheets.
  • Keep a damp towel over the thawed phyllo sheets are you work to keep them from drying out.
  • Make sure to squeeze out as much moisture from the spinach as possible so the borek doesn't get too watery.
Turkish borek recipe with spinach, feta and herb filling.
Is borek and spanakopita the same?

Turkish borek and Greek spanakopita are both savory spinach pies with some differences. Borek is brushed with a glaze that has olive oil, melted butter and milk, giving the borek a more tender bite.

Can you make borek ahead of time?

Yes, layer and bake borek ahead of time and keep in an airtight container for up to 3 days. To reheat, place in the oven until warmed through or on the stove top on low until warmed through.

🥗 What to serve with Turkish Borek

Borek are fantastic served alone as a snack or along other sides. Here are a few suggestions.

  • Homemade Tzatziki Sauce
  • Tomato Fattoush Salad
  • Lemon Orzo Salad
  • Israeli Chopped Salad
Print Recipe
4.86 from 14 votes

Turkish Borek (Spinach and Feta Pie)

Turkish borek are savory pastries that are layered with phyllo and a mixture of spinach, feta and herbs and brushed with a buttery glaze.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time45 minutes mins
Thawing8 hours hrs
Total Time9 hours hrs
Course: Appetizer, Mezze
Cuisine: Mediterranean, Turkish
Keyword: borek recipe, Turkish borek
Servings: 12 squares
Calories: 144kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Equipment

  • Nesting Bowls

Ingredients

  • 1 roll Phyllo defrosted: 2 "packages" come in a box, just used 1

Spinach Filling:

  • 3 cups frozen spinach defrosted and squeezed of excess water
  • ½ cup feta cheese crumbled
  • 1 egg
  • ½ cup Fresh parsley leaves roughly chopped
  • ½ cup Fresh dill roughly chopped
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon Ground black pepper

Borek Glaze

  • 6 tablespoons unsalted butter melted
  • ⅓ cup milk
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 1 egg

Topping Glaze:

  • ⅓ cup milk
  • 1 egg
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • In a large bowl, add the thawed spinach, crumbled feta cheese, fresh herbs, 1 egg and season with salt and pepper. Stir to combine well.
  • In the 2nd bowl, add the glaze ingredients. Whisk the melted butter, milk, olive oil and egg until well combined. And in the 3rd bowl, add the topping glaze ingredients and whisk the milk and egg.
  • Unroll phyllo sheets and cover with a damp towel to keep it from drying. If your box of phyllo has 2 rolls of phyllo, just use 1.
  • Brush a 9 by 13 pan with the butter glaze mixture on all sides and bottom.
  • Layer the first phyllo sheet into the pan and brush with glaze. Continue this for 10 layers or about half of the phyllo sheets.
  • Add the spinach and feta filling and distribute evenly. Then top with another sheet of phyllo and continue layering a phyllo sheet, then brushing with glaze until all the sheets are used up.
  • Once all the phyllo sheets are used, brush with the topping glaze and use a sharp knife to cut the borek into 12 squares or 24 triangles.
  • Bake the spinach borek at 350 degrees Fahrenheit for 40-45 minutes or until the top is golden brown.

Video

Notes

  • Thaw frozen phyllo in the fridge overnight or at room temperature for an hour.
  • Cut the borek before baking as the phyllo will be delicate after baking.
  • Recipe slightly adapted from Sultan's Kitchen Cookbook

Nutrition

Calories: 144kcal | Carbohydrates: 3g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 63mg | Sodium: 221mg | Potassium: 205mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 1g | Vitamin A: 5218IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 114mg | Iron: 1mg

Green Falafel with Herbs and Spinach

Feb 15, 2023 · 8 Comments

Herb green falafel is served with hummus, olive oil and pine nuts.

Perfectly fried falafel are crispy on the outside and tender on the inside. This green falafel twist is made with the addition of fresh herbs and tender baby spinach, giving the homemade fried falafel an eye popping green hue. Serve herb falafel on top of hummus, your favorite salad or stuffed inside pita.

Fresh green falafel on a bed of creamy hummus.

These green falafel are an adaptation of my classic homemade falafel recipe, with the addition of fresh herbs and baby spinach, giving the fried falafel a gorgeous green color.

Traditionally, you'll find falafel with herbs added into the mixture, which usually offers a slight green or yellow hue. With this twist, I upped the amount of fresh herbs and added tender baby spinach, giving the fried falafel a pop of freshness and a deeper green color.

Once you make homemade falafel, the variations are endless! Keep it classic and serve falafel stuffed inside homemade pita bread or in Mediterranean falafel bowls drizzled with the creamiest tahini sauce or simply serve on top of homemade hummus like we have here.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🌿 Ingredients

  • Dried Garbanzo Beans: Dried chickpeas are essential in making a crispy falafel. Canned beans are way too soft for falafel and won't produce the same texture. Make sure to soak the dried chickpeas for at least 8 hours beforehand.
  • Fresh Herbs: Cilantro, parsley and mint brighten the falafel with fresh flavors and also give the falafel a gorgeous green color.
  • Fresh Spinach: Baby spinach is tender and blends up with the herbs easily. This also gives the green falafel and beautiful green color. You can use baby kale instead of spinach.
  • Onion and Garlic: These are classic aromatics in most falafel recipes. I like using a yellow onion for falafel.
  • Spices: Cumin and coriander are warm spices that give depth to the falafel.
  • Flour: Use either all-purpose flour, chickpea flour or a gluten-free flour blend. A little flour is needed to help bind the mixture together.
  • Baking Soda and Baking Powder: Both of these are used to keep the falafel light and crisp.
  • High Heat Cooking Oil: Because falafel are shallow fried in batches, a high smoke point oil is important. Avocado oil is a a great high heat cooking oil but can be expensive. Other options are canola oil, grapeseed oil or vegetable oil.

🥙 How to Make Green Falafel

For a detailed step by step recipe with photos, check out my homemade falafel recipe.

  1. Add the dried chickpeas to a large bowl and completely cover with cool water. Allow beans to sit overnight or for at least 8 hours and doubled in size.
  2. Once done, drain the chickpeas and add them to a food processor and pulse a few times until texture looks crumbly and there are no large pieces left. Then transfer the processed beans to a large bowl.
  3. In the same food processor, add the fresh herbs, fresh spinach, onion, garlic and spices. Pulse everything together until it almost looks like a paste and there are no large pieces of onion or herbs.
  4. Add the herb mixture to the beans, along with the flour, baking soda and baking powder and use a large spatula to mix everything very well. Set the mixture aside and place in the refrigerator while the oil heats up.
  5. Heat a large skillet with vegetable oil and bring oil up to 375 degrees Fahrenheit. This is a good time to use an infrared thermometer or you can test to see if the oil is hot by dropping a small piece of batter. If it sizzles, it's ready.
  6. Use a large tablespoon and form batter into balls, about 2 tablespoons worth and use your palms to form the mixture into a ball, without compacting too much.
  7. Carefully place the falafel in the hot oil. You can fit 4-5 in at once but don't overcrowd the pan. Fry on the first side until you can see it browning on the sides, about 4-5 minutes. Then flip over and fry other side.
  8. Transfer the falafel to a wire rack that is fitted on top of baking sheet and sprinkle with salt while the falafel are still hot. Continue frying the falafel in batches.
  9. To serve, place falafel on top of hummus and sprinkle toasted pine nuts, a pinch of cayenne and drizzle of olive oil. Garnish with fresh mint leaves.
Serve fried green falafel on top of hummus with a drizzle of olive oil.

📍 Falafel Making Tips

  • Use dried beans for the best authentic falafel. This recipe will not work with canned beans.
  • For gluten-free falafel, use a gluten-free flour blend or chickpea flour.
  • Make sure the oil is hot before adding the falafel. Test the oil with a small piece of batter, if it sizzles right away, it's ready.
  • Don't overcrowd the pan when frying, fry anywhere from 3-5 falafel at a time depending on the size of your skillet.
Can you make falafel ahead of time?

Yes, you can make the mixture ahead of time up to 1 day in advance, but don't add the flour, baking soda or baking powder until right before frying. You can also fry the falafel, chill and freeze for up to 2 weeks.

How do you keep falafel from falling apart?

A little flour is all you need to keep the falafel mixture together. As the falafel mixture sits, moisture can seep out and if that happens, mix in 1-2 more tablespoons of flour.

What to Serve Falafel With

  • Israeli Chopped Salad
  • Homemade Pita Bread
  • Chopped Kale and Chickpea Salad with Tahini Dressing
  • Heirloom Tomato Fattoush Salad
  • Quinoa Tabbouleh with Mint

More Falafel inspiration

  • Black Bean Falafel with Heirloom Tomato Salsa
  • Falafel Collard Wrap With All The Fillings
  • Learn how to make homemade Lebanese falafel recipe with dried chickpeas, loads of fresh herbs and warm spices. Serve with creamy tahini yogurt.
    Homemade Lebanese Falafel Recipe with Tahini Yogurt
  • Fried falafel balls served in a bowl with chopped salad and hummus.
    What to Serve with Falafel (20 + Ideas!)
Green falafel with herbs is perfectly fried and served on top of hummus.
Print Recipe
5 from 8 votes

Green Falafel with Herbs and Spinach

Green falafel are made with loads of fresh herbs and tender baby spinach, giving the homemade falafel a gorgeous green hue.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Soaking8 hours hrs
Total Time8 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
Course: Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine: Mediterranean
Keyword: green falafel, herb falafel
Servings: 12 falafel
Calories: 74kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Equipment

  • skillet
  • Infrared Thermometer
  • Fish Spatula

Ingredients

  • 1 cup dried garbanzo beans
  • 1 cup fresh baby spinach
  • ½ cup fresh mint leaves
  • ½ cup fresh parsley leaves
  • ½ medium sized yellow onion roughly chopped
  • 2 garlic cloves roughly chopped
  • 1 teaspoon cumin
  • 1 teaspoon coriander
  • Pinch of cayenne optional, for heat
  • ½ teaspoon baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt + more for garnish
  • 3 tablespoons flour all-purpose or gluten free
  • Canola or vegetable oil for frying

For Serving

  • Hummus homemade or store bought
  • Toasted pine nuts
  • Fresh mint leaves for garnish
  • Pinch of cayenne
  • Olive oil for garnish
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Add the dried chickpeas to a large bowl and completely cover with cool water. Allow beans to sit overnight or for at least 8 hours and doubled in size.
  • Once done, drain the chickpeas and add them to a food processor and pulse a few times until texture looks crumbly, and there are no large pieces left. Then transfer the processed beans to a large bowl.
  • In the same food processor, add the fresh herbs, fresh spinach, onion, garlic and spices. Pulse everything together until it almost looks like a paste and there are no large pieces of onion or herbs.
  • Add the herb mixture to the beans along with the flour, baking soda and baking powder and use a large spatula to mix everything very well. Set aside and place the mixture in the refrigerator while the oil heats up.
  • Heat a large skillet with vegetable oil and bring oil up to about 375 degrees Fahrenheit. This is a good time to use an infrared thermometer or you can test to see if the oil is hot by dropping a small piece of batter. If it sizzles, it's ready.
  • Use a large tablespoon and form batter into balls, about 2 tablespoons worth and use your palms to form the mixture into a ball, without compacting too much.
  • Carefully place the falafel in the hot oil. You can fit 4-5 in at once but don't overcrowd the pan. Fry on the first side until you can see it browning around the sides, about 4-5 minutes. Then flip over and fry the other side.
  • Transfer the falafel to a wire rack that is fitted on top of baking sheet and sprinkle with salt while the falafel are still hot. Continue frying the falafel in batches.
  • To serve, place falafel on top of hummus and sprinkle toasted pine nuts, a pinch of cayenne and drizzle of olive oil. Garnish with fresh mint leaves.

Notes

  • 1 cup of dried beans yields about double or 2 cups of beans after soaking.
  • If making the falafel mixture ahead of time, don't add the flour, baking soda or baking powder until right before frying. 
  • Make falafel ahead of time and freeze. Fry, chill and place falafel in a resealable plastic bag in the freezer for up to 1 month. 
 

Nutrition

Calories: 74kcal | Carbohydrates: 13g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 0.1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.3g | Sodium: 248mg | Potassium: 215mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 539IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 39mg | Iron: 2mg

Four Cheese Pizza with Sausage and Peppers

Feb 14, 2023 · 5 Comments

Four cheese pizza with Italian sausage, roasted peppers and grated Parmesan.

This four cheese pizza with sausage and peppers is everything you want in a deliciously savory pizza! Melty mozzarella and creamy ricotta top the pizza along with crumbles of Italian sausage and strips of sweet roasted red peppers. Finish the pizza with a grating of Parmesan and fresh oregano leaves to bring all the flavors together!

Four cheese pizza with Italian sausage and peppers.

If there is one dish that I will never turn down, it's sausage and peppers. Usually, we'll enjoy a sausage and peppers sandwich on a soft roll with a caesar salad on the side and there is nothing better! For another wonderful pizza combination, try my Spinach Feta Pizza.

This pizza with sausage and peppers is strongly inspired from the classic Italian American dish. The pizza starts with four cheeses including melty mozzarella, creamy ricotta and savory Pecorino and Parmesan cheese. Here is my recipe for a Pizza Sandwich.

Once the four cheese pizza base is set, add cooked and crumbled Italian sausage and roasted red peppers. The combination of melty and creamy cheeses with the savory and rich sausage and sweet peppers is just out of this world!

For another fun pizza try my Fig Prosciutto Pizza with Balsamic, the fresh Figs are wonderful.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍅 Ingredients

  • Pizza Dough: Leave the dough at room temperature for at least 30 minutes, which will help the dough relax and make it easier to roll out.
  • Marinara Sauce: Keep it easy and your your favorite jarred marinara or use leftover marinara from Sunday gravy.
  • Mozzarella Cheese: Look for a dry mozzarella cheese which will have less moisture. I prefer to grate my own mozzarella, but pre-shredded always works in a pinch!
  • Ricotta Cheese: Look for a low-moisture ricotta or "basket ricotta". This style of ricotta is thicker and creamier and won't have excess moisture that could weigh down your pizza dough. If you have a Whole Foods near you, look for Bellwether Farms ricotta which is one of my favorites!
  • Parmesan Cheese: Parmigiano Reggiano is an aged hard Italian cheese that has fantastic saltiness. You can often find Parmesan grated or use a hand grater to grate a block of cheese yourself.
  • Pecorino Cheese: Pecorino cheese is a hard Italian sheeps milk cheese that grates very well. Pecorino is much saltier and stronger in flavor than Parmesan and is a great garnish to add more saltiness and savoriness to yoru dishes.
  • Italian Sausage: Most Italian sausage is seasoned with fennel and oregano and comes in mild or spicy with hot red peppers added.
  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh oregano and, or basil leaves for garnish.

🍕 How to Make Pizza with Sausage and Red Peppers

  1. Preheat the oven to 500 degrees Fahrenheit at least 30 minutes minutes before cooking and place a pizza stone in the oven to preheat.
  2. Cook the sausage and bring a skillet to medium-high heat and add Italian sausage. Break the sausage up into crumbles and cook the sausage until cooked through and edges are caramelized and slightly crispy. Once done, set aside.
  3. Roll out the pizza dough on a lightly floured surface to a 10 inch circle.
  4. Spread a thin layer of marinara sauce onto the pizza, leaving a border around the dough.
  5. Top the pizza with slices of mozzarella, dollops of ricotta cheese, the crumbled sausage and slices of roasted red peppers.
  6. Finish the pizza with grated pecorino cheese, grated parmesan cheese, oregano leaves and a drizzle of olive oil.
  7. Transfer the pizza onto the pizza stone and cook the pizza for 5-8 minutes until the cheese and bubbly and melted and dough is golden brown.
Roll out the pizza dough to a 10 inch circle.
Top the pizza with four cheeses, including mozzarella, pecorino, mozzarella and Parmesan.
Add cooked crumbled Italian sausage to the cheese pizza.
Add roasted red peppers to thee sausage and cheese pizza.
Top the sausage pizza with a grating of parmesan cheese.
Pre-heat the oven and pizza stone and carefully transfer the pizza onto the hot stone.

📍Pizza Making Tips

  • Bring the pizza dough to room temperature at least 30 minutes before cooking, which will make rolling out much easier.
  • If the dough springs back when you are rolling out, let it relaxe for a few more minutes.
  • A pizza stone gives a great crispy crust, but if you don't have one, turn a baking sheet upside down and preheat that in the oven.
Pizza with sausage and peppers and fresh oregano.

Substitutions and Variations

  • If you don't eat pork, substitute with Italian spiced chicken sausage.
  • Make the pizza spicy and use spicy Italian sausage or add red pepper flakes or Calabrian peppers.
  • Instead of using jarred peppers, roast your own peppers! Place a whole red pepper under the broiler and turn until charred on all sides. Then remove the charred layer and slice into strips.
Do you need to cook sausage before putting on pizza?

Yes, sausage takes a lot longer to fully cook than pizza, so it's very important to fully cook sausage before adding as a topping.

What is the best sausage for pizza?

Look for an Italian seasoned sausage for great flavor. Italian sausage is seasoned with fennel and other seasonings and can be mild or spicy.

More Pizza ideas

  • Calzones Stuffed with Broccoli Rabe and Ricotta
  • Turkish pide with two different fillings of cheese and another with spiced ground beef, peppers and tomatoes.
    Turkish Pide (Turkish Pizza) with 2 Different Fillings
  • Ratatouille Pizza
  • It's Time to Grill Your Pizza

Even more Pizza Inspiration

  • Squash blossom pizza with creamy burrata cheese and fresh basil.
    Squash Blossom Pizza with Burrata
  • Spring Pizza with Pesto, Asparagus and Fresh Lemon Zest
  • Kale and Egg Breakfast Pizza
  • Prosciutto and Caramelized Pear Pizza with Balsamic Glaze
Four cheese pizza with Italian sausage, roasted peppers and grated Parmesan.
Print Recipe
5 from 12 votes

Four Cheese Pizza with Sausage and Peppers

This four cheese pizza with sausage and peppers is everything you want in a deliciously savory pizza! Garnish with fresh oregano and grated Parmesan.
Prep Time1 hour hr
Cook Time10 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 10 minutes mins
Course: Dinner, Main
Cuisine: American, Italian
Keyword: four cheese pizza, pizza with sausage and peppers, red pepper pizza
Servings: 2 pizzas
Calories: 1703kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Equipment

  • Pizza Stone
  • Pizza Cutter
  • Pizza Peel

Ingredients

  • 1 pound pizza dough room temperature, cut in half
  • All-purpose flour for dusting
  • 1 cup marinara sauce
  • 1 cup mozzarella cheese sliced or shredded
  • 1 cup full fat ricotta cheese drained of excess moisture
  • ½ pound Italian sausage about 2 links, crumbled
  • 1 jarred roasted red pepper cut into strips
  • ¼ cup grated Parmesan cheese
  • ¼ cup grated Pecorino cheese

Toppings

  • Fresh oregano leaves
  • Fresh basil leaves roughly torn
  • Olive oil
  • Chili flakes or Calabrian peppers, optional
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 500 degrees Fahrenheit at least 30 minutes minutes before cooking and place a pizza stone in the oven to preheat.
  • Cook the sausage and bring a skillet to medium-high heat and add Italian sausage. Break the sausage up into crumbles and cook the sausage until cooked through and edges are caramelized and slightly crispy. Once done, set aside and drain on a paper towel lined plate.
  • Roll out both halves of the pizza dough on a lightly floured surface to a 10 inch circle.
  • Spread a thin layer of marinara sauce onto both pizzas, leaving a border around the dough.
  • Top the pizzas with the slices or shredded mozzarella, dollops of ricotta cheese, the crumbled sausage and slices of roasted red peppers.
  • Finish the pizza with grated pecorino cheese, grated parmesan cheese, oregano leaves and a drizzle of olive oil.
  • Transfer the pizza onto the pizza stone and cook the pizza for 5-8 minutes until the cheese is bubbly and melted and dough is golden brown.

Notes

  • If a pizza stone is not available, use a baking sheet! Turn a baking sheet upside down and preheat that in the oven. 
  • Look for a thick ricotta with less moisture or drain ricotta in a fine mesh strainer over a bowl to drain excess moisture. This will make for a thicker and creamier ricotta cheese. 
  • Dust some flour under the dough before adding the toppings, so it transfers easily into the oven. 

Nutrition

Calories: 1703kcal | Carbohydrates: 85g | Protein: 98g | Fat: 110g | Saturated Fat: 57g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 29g | Cholesterol: 317mg | Sodium: 4351mg | Potassium: 1383mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 20g | Vitamin A: 5932IU | Vitamin C: 167mg | Calcium: 1209mg | Iron: 8mg

Cast Iron Steaks with Mushroom

Feb 9, 2023 · 2 Comments

Cast iron seared steaks with wild mushrooms and herbs.

A true classic, there is nothing like a well made steak! A perfectly seared cast iron steak is an impressive recipe that everyone should have in their back pocket. Once seared, the steaks are finished with a garlic herb butter baste and a variety of garlic sautéed mushrooms.

Sliced New York strip with wild mushrooms and herbs.

There is something to be said about a well seared steak with the perfect medium rare center. This recipe for cast iron steak with mushrooms walks you through how to cook the perfect New York strip steak at home. If you prefer a more tender filet, here is a great recipe for cast iron filet mignon. For a great steak appetizer that is going to impress your guests, try my Steak crostini.

The steak is seared in a hot cast iron skillet, then basted with a flavorful garlic and herb infused butter. While the steak is resting, saute a variety of wild mushrooms to serve along with the New York strip steak. Serve these Cast Iron Steaks with Turkish Sumac Onions for a more great flavor in every bite.

For the perfect side dish to go along with these steaks my Flavorful Mediterranean Rice will go perfectly.

This recipe for cast iron steak is part of a date night in series. Serve alongside pasta with tomato mascarpone sauce or mussels marinara.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍄 Ingredients

  • New York Strip: Look for steaks that are at least 1 inch thick. This will ensure that the steaks are not overcooked.
  • Kosher Salt and Ground Pepper: A course Kosher salt and medium grind of black pepper is all the seasoning you need for the steaks. Don't be shy with the salt and pepper and season all of the sides of the steak.
  • Butter: Use an unsalted butter to control the salt. There is butter in searing and basting the steak. And if you have access to a good quality European butter, that will make the recipe taste even better.
  • Garlic Cloves: A few smashed garlic cloves are added to the garlic butter baste and another few are finely chopped and sautéed with the mushrooms.
  • Herbs: Use any combination of fresh rosemary, thyme and oregano for the herb bundle.
  • Mushrooms: Use any combination of smaller mushrooms, such as button mushrooms, cremini or shiitaki mushrooms and enoki mushrooms.

🥩 How to Cook a New York Strip Steak

  1. Bring the steak out to room temperature at least 20 minutes before cooking.
  2. When ready to cook, place a medium sized cast iron skillet over high heat and season the steak liberally with salt and pepper on all sides.
  3. Once the cast iron is very hot, add butter and oil and sear the steak on the first side, until a deep crust is formed, about 3-4 minutes.
  4. Once the first side is seared, turn the steak over and continue searing until deeply caramelized. Sear the sides and fat cap as well.
  5. Add a few more tablespoons of butter, the herb bundle and garlic cloves and baste the butter onto the steak. Carefully tilt the pan towards you and push the steak away from you in the pan. Then use a spoon to baste the butter onto the steak, for another 30 seconds.
  6. Once steak is done, remove is to a cutting board and cover with foil to rest for at least 10 minutes.
  7. Lower the heat in the cast iron and add another tablespoon of butter, chopped garlic and saute for 30 seconds. Then add the mushrooms, season with salt and pepper and saute until mushrooms are tender, for 3-5 minutes.
  8. Once the steak has rested, slice against the grain and serve with garlic sautéed mushrooms.
Sear the New York strips in a hot cast iron skillet with butter.
Once you turn the seared steaks over, add herbs, garlic and another tablespoon of butter.
Sear thicker cuts of steak, such as a New York strip on all sides.
Baste the seared steaks with a garlic and herb infused butter.
Once the steaks have seared on all sides, remove them to a cutting board to rest for at least 10 minutes.

Tips for Cooking the Perfect Steak

  • Bring the steaks out to room temperature at least 20 minutes before cooking. This will ensure that steaks have a better sear and cook more evenly.
  • Make sure the cast iron skillet is VERY hot and almost smoking. Once it's hot, then add the seasoned steaks.
  • Don't overcrowd the pan. Depending how large the cast iron skillet is, only add 1-2 steaks at a time, so they can get a good sear.
  • Once the steaks are done, let the meat rest for at least 10 minutes before slicing.
Seared cast iron New York strip steaks with mushrooms, garlic and herbs.

🌡️ Steak Cooking Temperatures

If you are nervous about knowing when the center of the steak is done, use a digital meat thermometer. Probe the thermometer into the center of the steak for the internal temperature.

  • Rare: 125-130 degrees Fahrenheit
  • Medium Rare: 140-140 degrees Fahrenheit
  • Medium: 140-150 degrees Fahrenheit
  • Medium Well: 150-155 degrees Fahrenheit
  • Well Done: 160 + degrees Fahrenheit
How long should you cook a New York Strip?

For a 1-½ inch New York strip, cook the steak for 3-4 minutes per side for medium rare.

New York Strip vs. Ribeye?

New York strip steak is leaner than a ribeye and has a fat cap on the side of the steak. A butter baste will help flavor and tenderize the NY strip. A ribeye steak has more marbling and is a more tender cut of steak.

More great Beef ideas

  • Grilled Tomahawk Steak with Chimichurri Compound Butter
  • Individual Beef Wellington
  • Italian beef braciole recipe served with a rich tomato sauce and garnished with fresh parsley.
    Beef Braciole with Prosciutto, Merlot and Parmesan
  • Grilled Steak and Tomatoes (Spanish Dinner Recreation)

What Sides to Serve with Steak

  • Pesto broccolini is full of flavor and made in under 30 minutes! Roasted broccolini is tossed with fresh pesto and finished with bright lemon zest.
    Pesto Broccolini
  • Parmesan Shaved Brussels Sprouts Salad with Pistachios
    Parmesan Brussels Sprouts Salad with Pistachios
  • Creme Fraiche Mashed Potatoes with Roasted Garlic
  • Wild Mushroom Risotto
Cast iron seared steaks with wild mushrooms and herbs.
Print Recipe
5 from 5 votes

Cast Iron Steaks with Mushrooms

Perfectly seared cast iron steaks with mushrooms is an impressive and elegant dinner recipe. Finish the steak with a flavorful herb butter baste.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Resting10 minutes mins
Total Time45 minutes mins
Course: Dinner, Main
Cuisine: American
Keyword: cast iron steaks, seaqred New York strip steak
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 446kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $30

Equipment

  • Cast Iron Skillet

Ingredients

For the Steaks

  • 2 New York Strip steaks about ½-3/4 pound each
  • Kosher Salt and Ground Pepper
  • 3 tablespoons Unsalted butter divided
  • 2 tablespoons Avocado oil or other high heat cooking oil
  • 2 Garlic cloves peeled and gently smashed
  • Herb bundle any combination of rosemary, thyme and or oregano

Mushrooms

  • 1 tablespoon butter
  • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • 1 pint mushrooms any small variety such as button, cremini, shiitake
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • Ground black pepper
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Remove the steaks from the fridge and leave out at room temperature for at least 20 minutes before cooking.
  • When ready to cook, place a medium sized cast iron skillet over high heat.
  • Dry the steaks very well with paper towels and season the steaks liberally with salt and pepper on all sides.
  • Once the cast iron is very hot, add 1 tablespoon of butter and avocado oil to the skillet and sear the steaks on the first side, until a deep crust is formed, about 3-4 minutes.
  • Once the first side is seared, turn the steaks over and continue searing until deeply caramelized. Sear the sides and fat cap as well.
  • Add a 2 more tablespoons of butter, the herb bundle and peeled garlic cloves and baste the butter onto the steak. Carefully tilt the pan towards you and push the steaks away from you in the pan. Then use a spoon to baste the butter onto the steaks, for another 30 seconds.
  • Once steaks are done, remove them to a cutting board and cover with foil to rest for at least 10 minutes.
  • Lower the heat in the cast iron and add a tablespoon of butter and the chopped garlic and saute for 30 seconds. Then add the mushrooms, season with salt and pepper and saute until mushrooms are tender, for 3-5 minutes.
  • Once steaks have rested, slice against the grain and serve with garlic mushrooms.

Video

Notes

  • Let the steaks come to room temperature for at least 20 minutes before cooking. 
  • NewYork strips are a leaner cut of steak, so don't be shy with the butter!
  • Pat the meat dry very well with paper towels, this will help the seasoning stick. 

Nutrition

Calories: 446kcal | Carbohydrates: 5g | Protein: 27g | Fat: 36g | Saturated Fat: 15g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 15g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 121mg | Sodium: 380mg | Potassium: 745mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 350IU | Vitamin C: 3mg | Calcium: 39mg | Iron: 2mg

Creamy Tomato Mascarpone Sauce with Pasta

Feb 7, 2023 · 11 Comments

Creamy and easy tomato mascarpone sauce with parmesan and fresh basil.

Creamy and luxurious, this tomato mascarpone sauce will be your favorite weeknight pasta sauce! Tangy mascarpone cheese creates the most velvety pink tomato sauce and tastes like it's been simmering or hours!

Easy creamy tomato mascarpone sauce with linguine.

This tomato mascarpone sauce is a quick pink sauce that is done in nearly 20 minutes and tastes like the sauce has been simmering for hours! What makes this simple tomato sauce so decadent is the addition of creamy and thick mascarpone cheese, which offers a slight sweetness and acidity to the tomato sauce. And if you have leftover mascarpone, use it in this colorful heirloom tomato tart with mascarpone!

Usually, when I make my pink vodka sauce, I roast the tomatoes for an hour, which gives a fantastic sweetness. But on a weeknight, when I am craving something luxurious, rich and without the fraction of the work, I make this quick and creamy tomato mascarpone sauce.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍝 Why You'll Love this Recipe

  • Tomato mascarpone sauce is made in nearly 20 minutes.
  • The sauce thickens and clings to pasta easily!
  • Great flavors with minimal ingredients!
  • The mascarpone makes the tomato sauce ulta luxurious, decadent and comforting.

🍅 Ingredients

  • Olive Oil: The start of most pasta sauces. use a good quality olive oil and save some for garnish.
  • Garlic: A few cloves, finely chopped and added to gently saute with the olive oil.
  • Dried Oregano: A pinch of dried oregano balances the sweet and savory notes of the sauce.
  • Tomato Paste: I love using tomato paste that comes in a tube for easy use.
  • Crushed Tomatoes: Use canned crushed tomatoes or tomato puree for a smooth sauce.
  • Mascarpone Cheese: Mascarpone cheese nis a thick Italian cream cheese that comes in a tub. You can often find it with the other cheeses in grocery stores. If mascarpone isn't available, substitute with American style cream cheese
  • Parmesan Cheese: Freshly grated parmesan cheese is added to the sauce as well as for garnish.
  • Fresh Basil: A few leaves of fresh basil freshen up the rich pasta sauce. You can also use fresh oregano which would be a nice flavor as well.

⏲️ Instructions

  1. Boil salted water and cook pasta 1-2 minutes shy of package directions. Once pasta is done cooking, reserve ½ cup of the starchy pasta water for later use.
  2. Bring a wide skillet over medium heat and drizzle with olive oil. Once shimmering, add the chopped garlic, add garlic and dried oregano and saute for 1 minute or until garlic is fragrant.
  3. Add the tomato puree and tomato paste and season with salt and pepper. Fill the tomato can halfway with water and add that to the sauce.
  4. Simmer the sauce for 10 minutes so the flavors come together.
  5. Whisk in the mascarpone cheese and parmesan cheese until well combined.
  6. When pasta is done, add the cooked pasta directly to the tomato and mascarpone sauce and toss to combine, so the sauce evenly coats all of the pasta. If sauce is too dry, add some pasta water and continue tossing.
  7. Serve pasta in bowls and garnish with a drizzle of olive oil, grated parmesan cheese and fresh basil.
Add the chopped garlic to the olive oil.
Add crushed tomatoes to the garlic and olive oil stir together.
add ½ cup of mascarpone cheese to the tomato sauce and whisk together.
Add grated parmesan cheese to the tomato mascarpone sauce and stir to combine.
Whisk the tomato mascarpone sauce together until the sauce is a blush pink color.
Add the cooked pasta directly into the creamy tomato mascarpone sauce and toss to combine.

Recipe Tips

  • When cooking pasta, save 1 cup of of the starchy pasta water, to add to the sauce if the sauce is too thick.
  • Boil the pasta for 1-2 minutes less than the box directions and finish cooking the pasta directly in the sauce.
Simple creamy tomato mascarpone sauce with pasta.

🌶️ Variations and Substitutions

  • If mascarpone cheese isn't available, substitute with cream cheese.
  • For added heat, add ½ teaspoon of chili flakes or Calabrian peppers.
  • Use this creamy mascarpone tomato sauce as a base for pizza.
  • Serve the pasta with seared scallops or shrimp on top.
What does mascarpone cheese taste like?

Mascarpone is a thick Italian cream cheese that is rich, slightly sweet and has a touch of acidity and is often compared to cream cheese.

Does mascarpone sauce melt when heated?

Yes, mascarpone melts nicely when heated and is a great addition to a pink sauce for pasta. As the mascarpone sauce melts into the tomato sauce, it creates a lovely creamy pink pasta sauce.

What to Serve With

This recipe was made as part of a date night dinner menu. Here are some suggestions on what to serve alongside.

  • Pan Seared Pork Chops with Garlic and Thyme
  • Spatchcock Chicken with Lemon and Butter
  • Pesto Broccolini
  • Homemade Caesar Salad

More pasta recipes

  • Cherry tomato pasta with basil and garlic.
    Cherry Tomato Pasta with Garlic and Basil
  • Kale Pasta with Capers and Olives
  • Roasted butternut squash pasta topped with fried sage and pancetta.
    Creamy Butternut Squash Pasta Sauce with Sage
  • Homemade meatballs with Sunday gravy is a true labor of love. Meatballs are mixed with three meats and seasoned with flavorful aromatics which are then simmered in marinara for hours making them incredibly tender and flavorful.
    Homemade Meatballs with Sunday Gravy
Creamy and easy tomato mascarpone sauce with parmesan and fresh basil.
Print Recipe
4.87 from 15 votes

Creamy Tomato Mascarpone Sauce with Pasta

This easy tomato mascarpone sauce is made with crushed tomatoes, tangy mascarpone cheese and Parmesan and made in nearly 20 minutes!
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Total Time20 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: Italian
Keyword: tomato and mascarpone sauce, tomato mascarpone sauce
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 835kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro

Equipment

  • skillet

Ingredients

  • 1 pound linguini or your favorite long noodle shape
  • 2 tablespoons Olive oil + more for garnish
  • 3 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • ½ teaspoon dried oregano
  • 1 tablespoon tomato paste
  • 28 ounce can crushed tomatoes or tomato puree
  • ½ cup mascapone cheese
  • ½ cup grated Parmesan cheese + more for garnish
  • Fresh basil leaves
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Boil salted water and cook pasta 1-2 minutes shy of package directions. Once pasta is done cooking, reserve 1 cup of the starchy pasta water for later use.
  • Bring a wide skillet over medium heat and drizzle with olive oil. Once shimmering, add the chopped garlic, add garlic and dried oregano and saute for 1 minute or until garlic is fragrant.
  • Add the tomato puree and tomato paste and season with salt and pepper. Add the tomato puree and tomato paste and season with salt and pepper. Fill the tomato can halfway with water and add that to the sauce.
  • Simmer the sauce for 10 minutes so the flavors come together.
  • Whisk in the mascarpone cheese and parmesan cheese until well combined.
  • When pasta is done, add the cooked pasta directly to the tomato and mascarpone sauce and toss to combine, so the sauce evenly coats all of the pasta. If sauce is too dry, add some pasta water and continue tossing.
  • Serve pasta in bowls and garnish with a drizzle of olive oil, grated parmesan cheese and fresh basil.

Video

Notes

Save 1 cup of starchy pasta cooking water to add to the sauce if needed. 
Cook the pasta for 1-2 minutes less than the package instructions, then finish cooking pasta in the sauce. 
Sauce can be made ahead up to 3 days in advance. 

Nutrition

Calories: 835kcal | Carbohydrates: 101g | Protein: 31g | Fat: 34g | Saturated Fat: 20g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 74mg | Sodium: 507mg | Potassium: 909mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 10g | Vitamin A: 1982IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 460mg | Iron: 5mg

Mussels Marinara with Garlic and Basil

Feb 7, 2023 · 3 Comments

Steamed mussels in marinara sauce topped with fresh basil leaves.

This recipe for mussels marinara is easy, quick and full of fresh flavors! Fresh mussels are gently simmered in a simple and flavorful marinara sauce with garlic, white wine and basil. And don't forget the crusty bread to sop up the delicious marinara sauce!

Easy and quick mussels marinara recipe served with toasted bread.

Mussels marinara is a simple Italian American recipe that is cooked in nearly 20 minutes. The longest part of the recipe is cleaning the mussels, which will be explained further in this post.

The cleaned mussels are then simmered in a simple marinara sauce with garlic and basil and cooked until the mussels just open up. Then grab some crusty bread (or roasted garlic and herb focaccia) and dig into the flavorful marinara sauce! For another Seafood recipe with an Italian Spin, try my Halibut Piccata.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

A Little Story

Each year on my birthday (which is Halloween!), I have one request. To cook a bunch of fresh mussels in marinara sauce. I grab the crusty bread and happily dip it into the flavorful marinara sauce with a scoop of sauce in the mussel shell and there is nothing better!

Mussels marinara is childhood favorite of mine. As kids, my cousins, grandparents aunt and uncle would frequent a New Jersey restaurant called Ilvento's, which is no longer around. We would order bowls of mussels marinara and happily dig in until the bowl was empty. And now as an adult, I make my own mussels marinara recipe each year on my birthday (or sometimes I'll switch it up and make Thai Coconut Curry Mussels.)

🥫 Ingredients

  • Mussels: Look for fresh mussels without any cracks in the shell. Mussels should be cooked the same day they are bought and always kept cold. More on how to clean mussels below.
  • Olive Oil: This will be used to saute the chopped garlic.
  • Garlic: Fresh garlic cloves that are finely chopped or sliced. When buying garlic, look for tight packed cloves and cloves without any green stems growing out of the cloves.
  • White Wine: A touch of white wine brings a layer of acidity to the recipe. Use a lighter style such as Pinot Grigio.
  • Crushed Tomatoes: Use crushed canned tomatoes or passata, which are strained tomatoes.
  • Fresh Basil: A few fresh basil leaves are added to the simple marinara sauce, with some for garnish too.
  • Red Pepper Flakes: This is optional, but if you prefer a bit more heat and spice, add pinch of red pepper flakes, as garnish.

💦 How to Clean Mussels

It takes longer the clean mussels than it is to cook with them, but it will be worth it! Here is a simple step by step on how to clean mussels before cooking.

  1. Once you bring home the mussels from the store, remove them from the bag and place the mussels on top of ice in a large bowl and keep them cold in the refrigerator.
  2. When ready to cook, use a Shellfish scrubber or something similar and scrub each mussel under cold water.
  3. Each mussel has a “beard”, which is how the mussel holds onto rocks in the water and needs to be removed before cooking. Use a towel and pull off each beard.
  4. Place the cleaned mussels in ice cold water until ready to cook.
  5. Discard any mussels with cracked or broken shells and mussels that don’t open/close when tapped gently.
Pull the beard off of each mussel then soak mussels in cold water.
Soak the de-bearded mussels in ice cold water before cooking with them.

The next time you purchase mussels, same some and make a hearty French bouillabaisse!

📍How to Make Mussels Marinara

Mussels cook in less than 10 minutes, which makes this recipe a perfect weeknight meal or appetizer!

  1. Bring a medium sized skillet to medium heat and drizzle with olive oil.
  2. Once the oil is hot, add the chopped garlic and saute until fragrant.
  3. Pour in white wine and let that reduce for 30 seconds.
  4. Add the crushed tomatoes and fresh basil leaves and season with salt and pepper. Give the sauce a good stir and simmer for 10 minutes so all the flavors come together.
  5. Remove the cleaned mussels from the cold water and add them into the sauce and give them a gentle stir.
  6. Place a lid on the skillet and cook until the mussels just open up, about 6-7 minutes.
  7. Once done, transfer the mussels marinara to a large serving bowl and garnish with fresh basil and red pepper flakes.
Sauté chopped garlic in olive oil until fragrant.
Add crushed tomatoes to the garlic and olive oil stir together.
Add roughly chopped basil to the simmering marinara sauce.
Add clean mussels to simmering marinara sauce and cook until the mussels just open.

Recipe Tips

  • When soaking the mussels in water, add a ½ teaspoon of flour or salt to the water. This will help the mussels spit out any sand or debris.
  • Discard any broken or cracked mussel shells.
  • Mussels are best cooked and eaten on the same day they are purchased.

🍝 Variations and Substitutions

  • Add cooked linguine to the mussels marinara for a main course option.
  • Add a teaspoon of chopped Calabrian peppers to the marinara sauce for a spicier flavor.
  • Instead of mussels, use the same recipe with clams.
Mussels steamed in marinara sauce and garnished with fresh basil leaves.
How long should you cook mussels?

Mussels cook very quickly and in about 6-7 minutes. Cook the mussels until they just open up and discard any mussels that don't open after cooking.

Do you need to clean mussels before cooking?

Yes its very important to clean the mussels before cooking. Mussels can hold sand and other debris in the shells and the outside of the shell can have rocks and other debris. Take the time to rinse, scrub and remove the beards from each mussel.

More Seafood Recipes to Try

  • Coconut Curry Mussels
  • Steamed Clams with White Wine and Garlic
  • Shrimp Scampi with White Wine and Parmesan
  • Spanish Garlic Shrimp with Paprika
Steamed mussels in marinara sauce topped with fresh basil leaves.
Print Recipe
5 from 10 votes

Mussels Marinara with Garlic and Basil

Mussels marinara is easy, quick and full of flavors! Mussels gently simmer in a simple and flavorful marinara sauce with garlic, white wine and basil.
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time10 minutes mins
Total Time40 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer
Cuisine: American, Italian
Keyword: mussels marinara, mussels marinara recipe
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 215kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Equipment

  • skillet
  • Nesting Bowls

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds mussels
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil
  • 3 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • ¼ cup white wine such as Pinot Grigio
  • 14 ounce can of crushed tomatoes or tomato puree
  • 4-5 fresh basil leaves + more for garnish
  • ½ teaspoon Kosher salt
  • Ground black pepper
  • Red pepper flakes optional for garnish
  • Toasted bread for serving
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Keep the cleaned mussels soaked in ice cold before until ready to cook.
  • Bring a medium sized skillet to medium heat and drizzle with olive oil.
  • Once the oil is hot, add the chopped garlic and saute until fragrant, about 1 minute.
  • Pour in the white wine and let that reduce for 30 seconds.
  • Add the crushed tomatoes and fresh basil leaves and season with salt and pepper. Give the sauce a good stir and simmer for 10 minutes so all the flavors can come together.
  • Remove the cleaned mussels from the cold water and add them into the sauce and give them a gentle stir, so the sauce begins to coat the mussels.
  • Place a lid on the skillet and cook until the mussels just open up, about 6-7 minutes.
  • Once done, transfer the mussels marinara to a large serving bowl and garnish with fresh basil and red pepper flakes and serve with roasted bread.

Video

Notes

  • Mussels are best enjoyed the same day they are purchased. 
  • Do not reheat mussels, plan on purchasing, cleaning and cooking on the same day.
  • Mussels have a lot of water in them, so don't add any more water to the sauce. The sauce will loosen up once the mussels are simmering.  
  • Discard any broken or cracked shells. 

Nutrition

Calories: 215kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 10g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Cholesterol: 32mg | Sodium: 651mg | Potassium: 827mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 712IU | Vitamin C: 21mg | Calcium: 54mg | Iron: 6mg

Dessert Charcuterie Board

Feb 4, 2023 · 2 Comments

Medium sized dessert cheese board with cheese, macarons and jams.

Build a stunning, colorful and perfectly sweet dessert charcuterie board full of all your favorite sweet treats and cheeses to pair with!

Dessert charcuterie board with cookies, chocolate and served with sparkling proseco.

Whether you are building a charcuterie board for Valentines day or just want to make a sweet and simple dessert charcuterie board to snack on, you will love the cheese and dessert pairings for this dessert cheese board!

In a past life, I worked as a cheesemonger for a few years, and during that time I learned so much about cheese! I learned all about how to arrange a simple cheese board, as well as different cheese pairings with all sorts of additions, such asn sweets and cookies. This was a fun board to create and yes, you can have your dessert and eat it too (even with cheese!)

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍓Ingredients

Cheese pairs very well with sweets and desserts. Here are some ingredients to add to your dessert cheese board.

Cheese

  • Triple Cream Brie: Triple cream brie is decadent and rich. Some options are St Angel, shown in these photos and Delice de Bourgogne, which is rich and buttery. You can also look for a mild double cream brie, such as D'affinois.
  • Mascarpone: This is a creamy, thick and spreadable Italian cream cheese. Top mascarpone with dried rose petals or with strawberry or raspberry jam.
  • Kaltbach Cremeux: This is an alpine style cheese from Switzerland and personally, one of my all time favorite cheeses! Kaltbach cremeux melts really well and is delicious simply sliced on it's own. The flavor is slightly nutty and buttery. If kaltbach cremeux isn't available, look for Gruyere cheese.
  • Roquefort Blue Cheese: This is a sheeps milk blue cheese from France. Roquefort is creamy and slightly salty and spreads very well. Use roquefort cheese when making a blue cheese dressing or topping a grilled steak.
  • Aged Gouda: Aged gouda has lovely protein crystals called tyrosine. These give a great crunchy texture to the nutty and buttery cheese. Cut the aged gouda into rustic cubes.

Sweets and Crackers

  • Chocolate Bar: Use a good quality semi sweet or dark chocolate bar. Break up the pieces and add them to your dessert board.
  • Crackers: Look for buttery crackers and chocolate crackers to pair with the theme. Some favorite are these chocolate crackers and these buttery shortbread crackers.
  • Linzer Cookies: Or jam filled thumbprints.
  • Chocolate Covered Strawberries and Cherries: Melt chocolate and dip the strawberries into the melted chocolate. Do the same with maraschino cherries. Then place on a parchment lined plate to dry.
  • Fresh Berries: Raspberries, strawberries and cherries, if they are in season.
  • Macarons: Many local bakeries make macarons but they are also available online. feeling inspired, Let's make some Make Marzipan Fruits and give some as a sweet gift.
  • Honeycomb: Break up the honeycomb into small chunks and serve alongside the blue cheese.
  • Jam: Strawberry jam, raspberry jam and black cherry jam are some favorites.
  • Nuts: Because there are a lot of sweets on the dessert charcuterie board, look for something salty to balance the flavors, such as whole pistachios or almonds.

🍪 How to Arrange a Dessert Charcuterie Board

  1. Assemble the bowls with jams or mascarpone cheese onto the cheese board.
  2. Arrange the cheeses around the cheese board, evenly spaced out.
  3. Add the honeycomb next to the blue cheese and arrange the chocolate dipped strawberries.
  4. Nestle the crackers, cookies and macarons around the cheese and in the large areas.
  5. Fill in the gaps with fresh fruit, nuts and pieces of chocolate bar.
Dessert charcuterie board full of cookies, jams and cheese.

🧀 Dessert and Cheese Pairings

Try these fun and delicious cheese and dessert pairings.

  • Roquefort Blue Cheese + Honeycomb + Shortbread Crackers
  • Triple Cream Brie + Linzer Cookies or Jam Filled Thumbprints
  • Kaltbach Cremeux + Chocolate Cracker
  • Mascarpone Cheese + Raspberry Jam + Dark Chocolate
  • Aged Gouda + Chocolate Crackers
  • Triple Cream Brie + Shortbread Crackers + Strawberry Jam

📍Cheese Board Tips

  • Let the cheese sit at room temperature for at least 30 minutes before serving.
  • Make the board look full, without any gaps.
  • Make the chocolate covered strawberries ahead of time, so the chocolate has time to harden.
  • Cut the cheeses into different shapes for a better visual effect. Cut the gouda into cubes, the alpine style cheese into slices and the blue cheese into a wedge.
  • Serve your dessert charcuterie board with sparkling wine.
Dessert charcuterie board with different cheeses, cookies, chocolate and served with sparkling rosé.
What cheeses pair with dessert?

Cheese and dessert pair very well together! Try a creamy brie cheese with raspberry jam and jam filled cookies, such as thumbprints. And try aged gouda with dark chocolate.

Can you make a charcuterie board ahead of time?

Yes you can. If making a charcuterie board ahead of time, arrange the cheeses on the board and make sure the fruit is not wet and is fully dry. Keep the crackers separate until ready to serve, as the crackers can get soggy if placed in the refrigerator.

How much cheese per person?

A general rule is to have 2 ounces of each cheese, per person with 3-5 different styles of cheese.

More appetizer inspiration

  • How to Make a Simple Charcuterie Board
  • Italian charcuterie board with imported cheeses, meats, fruit and olives.
    Italian Charcuterie Board
  • Learn to make a colorful and flavorful vegetarian mezze platter with all the Mediterranean favorites, including stuffed grape leaves, hummus and fresh fruit and vegetables.
    Vegetarian Mezze Platter
  • Baked brie topped with cranberry sauce and pistachios.
    Cranberry Baked Brie with Honey and Pistachios
Medium sized dessert cheese board with cheese, macarons and jams.
Print Recipe
5 from 4 votes

Dessert Charcuterie Board

Build a stunning, colorful and perfectly sweet dessert charcuterie board full of all of your favorite sweet treats and cheeses to pair with!
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time10 minutes mins
Drying time for chocolate dipped fruit30 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American, French
Keyword: dessert board, dessert charcuterie board, dessert cheese board
Servings: 6 servings
Calories: 155kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $30

Ingredients

Cheese

  • 4 ounces Triple Cream Brie
  • 4 ounces Roquefort Blue Cheese
  • 4 ounces Kaltbach Cremeux sliced, or Gruyere cheese
  • ½ cup Aged Gouda cut into ½ inch cubes
  • ½ cup Mascarpone cheese top with dried rose petals, optional

Crackers and Sweets

  • Dark Chocolate Bar broken up into pieces or chunks
  • Crackers chocolate or shortbread crackers
  • Linzer Cookies or thumbprints
  • Fresh Raspberries
  • Chocolate Dipped Strawberries recipe below
  • Chocolate Dipped Maraschino Cherries recipe below
  • Macarons
  • Honeycomb cut into small chunks
  • Fruit Jam
  • Whole Pistachios
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

Make the Chocolate Dipped Strawberries

  • Wash and dry the strawberries very well. Dry the maraschino cherries.
  • Melt 1 cup of semi sweet chocolate chips in the microwave for 30 seconds until melted or use a double boiler.
  • If using a double boiler, add an inch of water to a small pot and place a heat proof glass bowl on top, making sure the bowl is not touching the water.
  • Pour 5 ounces of chocolate chips into the bowl and bring up to a simmer. Use a spatula to whisk the chocolate until melted.
  • Dip the fruit into the chocolate and place on a parchment lined plate until the chocolate has solidified.

Arrange the Dessert Board

  • Fill bowls with mascarpone cheese and another bowl with jam and assemble onto the cheese board. Garnish the mascarpone cheese with dried rose petals or jam.
  • Arrange the cheeses around the cheese board, evenly spaced out.
  • Add the honeycomb next to the blue cheese and arrange the chocolate dipped strawberries and cherries.
  • Nestle the crackers, cookies and macarons around the cheese and in the large areas.
  • Fill in the gaps with fresh fruit, nuts and pieces of chocolate bar.

Video

Notes

  • Measurements of cheeses are estimates, but a good rule of thumb is 2 ounces of each cheese, per person. 
  • Let cheese come to room temperature 30 minutes before serving.

Nutrition

Calories: 155kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 14g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 41mg | Sodium: 172mg | Potassium: 24mg | Sugar: 0.4g | Vitamin A: 374IU | Calcium: 164mg | Iron: 0.05mg

Greek Nachos with Hummus

Feb 2, 2023 · 32 Comments

Greek style nachos layered with pita chips, hummus and olives.

Dare I say that these Greek Nachos are even more delicious than the traditional version? Packed with gorgeous eye popping color, crunch and layers of flavor! Toasted pita chips are piled high with flavorful roasted chicken, creamy hummus and a bright a fresh chopped salad.

Greek nachos layered with yogurt, hummus and black olives.

Whether you call them Mediterranean nachos, hummus nachos or pita nachos, this fun and flavorful twist on Greek inspired nachos are packed with gorgeous eye popping color, crunch and loads of bold flavors!

Once you toast the pita chips, the possibilities are endless! Top the mediterranean nachos with homemade tzatziki sauce and with dollops of creamy homemade hummus and fresh chopped salad thats seasoned with herbs and lemon.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍅 Ingredients

  • Pita Bread: This will act as your "chips". Cut the pita into wedges and season with za'atar and bake in the oven until just crisped. You could also make homemade pita bread if you have the time.
  • Shredded Roasted Chicken: This is perfect for leftover roasted chicken or roast a few chicken breasts seasoned with turmeric, za'atar and cumin.
  • Hummus: Simple store bought hummus or homemade beet hummus would be striking and delicious.
  • Tzatziki: I use the same sauce for Greek fries and it's always a winner!
  • Chopped Salad: A must for anything Mediterranean! Chop up tomatoes and cucumbers and season with lemon juice, oil and a splash of balsamic vinegar.
  • Other Toppings: Feta cheese, pitted olives, tahini sauce, fresh herbs, chopped onion.
Ingredients for Greek nachos, including hummus, pita bread, yogurt and olives.

📋 Instructions

  1. Make the Pita Chips: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit and place pita wedges on a baking sheet. Season with za'atar, cumin, salt and pepper and drizzle with olive oil and toss to combine. Bake the pita chips for about 12-15 minutes until toasted.
  2. Roast Chicken Breast: Season the chicken breast with turmeric, cumin, za'atar and salt and pepper. Drizzle with olive oil and coat everything evenly all over chicken. Roast the chicken breasts in the oven at 400 degrees Fahrenheit for about 20 minutes, or until fully cooked through. Remove from the oven, cool slightly then shred the chicken and set aside.
  3. Make the Tzatziki: To a bowl, add grated cucumber, yogurt, lemon juice and mint and stir to combine.
  4. Make the Chopped Salad: To a bowl, add the chopped tomatoes and cucumber, fresh herbs, lemon juice, olive oil and vinegar and stir to combine.
  5. Assemble the Greek Nachos: Scatter the pita chips on the bottom of a platter, then top with the shredded chicken, dollops of hummus and tzatziki sauce and chopped salad and garnish with, crumbled feta cheese, chopped olives and diced red onion.
Loaded Greek nachos with pita chips, hummus, yogurt, chicken and olives.

🌶️ Substitutions and Variations

  • Use store bought pita chips to make Greek nachos even easier!
  • Leftover rotisserie chicken or leftover roasted chicken is perfect for this recipe!
  • Instead of classic hummus, substitute with red beet hummus for a pop of color.
  • For extra spice, add a dollop of spicy harissa sauce.
  • For a vegetarian option, omit the chicken and substitute with Mediterranean roasted vegetables.

Recipe Tip

Make a batch of pita chips ahead of time! Baked pita chips can be made up t o 3 days in advance and once toasted, let cool completely then seal in a resealable plastic bag or container.

What toppings should I put on Greek nachos?

These Greek inspired nachos are a fun twist and welcome all sorts of toppings! Make them hummus nachos with different hummus flavors and top with crumbled feta cheese and fresh herbs.

Can I make Greek nachos ahead of time?

If making the nachos ahead of time, make all of the components separately and then assemble before serving. The longer the toppings are on the pita chips, the soggier they will get.

 More Great Snacks

  • Poke Nachos
  • Loaded Hummus
  • Vegetarian Mezze Platter
  • Greek Tomato Fritters
Greek style nachos layered with pita chips, hummus and olives.
Print Recipe
5 from 26 votes

Greek Nachos with Hummus

Greek nachos are packed with crunch and layers of flavor! Toasted pita chips are topped with roasted chicken, hummus and colorful toppings.
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time25 minutes mins
Total Time40 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer, Dinner, Mezze
Cuisine: Greek, Mediterranean
Keyword: Greek nachos with hummus, Mediterranean nachos, pita nachos
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 592kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Equipment

  • Nesting Bowls

Ingredients

Pita Chips

  • 3 pita pockets cut into 8 wedges
  • ½ teaspoon za'atar
  • Salt and pepper to taste
  • Olive oil for drizzling

Roasted Chicken

  • 2 chicken breasts
  • ½ teaspoon turmeric
  • ½ teaspoon cumin
  • ½ teaspoon za'atar
  • Salt and pepper
  • Olive oil for drizzling

Tzatziki Sauce

  • ¾ cup plain yogurt
  • ½ Persian cucumber grated or diced
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice or juice from ½ a lemon
  • 2 tablespoons fresh mint chopped
  • Salt and pepper to taste

Chopped Salad

  • 2 Persian cucumbers chopped into small cubes
  • 1 medium sized tomatoes chopped into small cubes or cherry tomatoes cut in half
  • ¼ cup olive oil
  • 2 tablespoons balsamic vinegar
  • 2 tablespoons lemon juice or juice from ½ a lemon
  • Small bunch of fresh mint leaves roughly chopped
  • Salt and pepper, to taste

Additional Toppings

  • ½ cup hummus store bought or homemade
  • 1 cup feta cheese cut into small cubes or crumbled
  • ½ cup pitted Kalamata olives chopped
  • ¼ red onion finely diced
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Make the Pita Chips: Preheat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit and place pita wedges on a baking sheet. Season with za'atar, cumin, salt and pepper and drizzle with olive oil and toss to combine.
  • Bake the pita chips for about 12-15 minutes until toasted, then remove and set aside.
  • Roast Chicken Breast: Season the chicken breast with turmeric, cumin, za'atar and salt and pepper. Drizzle with olive oil and coat everything evenly all over chicken.
  • Roast the chicken breasts in the oven at 400 degrees Fahrenheit for about 20 minutes, or until fully cooked through. Remove the chicken from the oven and let cool slightly, then shred the chicken and set aside.
  • Make the Tzatziki: To a bowl, add the grated cucumber, yogurt, lemon juice and mint and stir to combine. Taste for seasoning and adjust as needed.
  • Make the Chopped Salad: To a bowl, add the chopped tomatoes and cucumber, fresh herbs, lemon juice, olive oil and vinegar and stir to combine.
  • Assemble the Greek Nachos: Scatter the pita chips onto the bottom of a platter, then top with the shredded chicken, dollops of hummus, tzatziki sauce and chopped salad.
  • Garnish the nachos with crumbled feta cheese, chopped olives and diced red onion.

Notes

If you can't find pita bread, store bought pita chips is a great substitute.
Use leftover roasted or rotisserie chicken instead of roasting your own.
To make vegetarian, omit chicken and load up with sauces and salads. 
Once assembled, the pita bread can get soggy, so plan on serving once assembled.

Nutrition

Calories: 592kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 38g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 112mg | Sodium: 1190mg | Potassium: 790mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 599IU | Vitamin C: 12mg | Calcium: 328mg | Iron: 3mg

 

One Pot Chicken and Rice with Lemon and Chickpeas

Jan 31, 2023 · 25 Comments

One pot Dutch oven chicken thighs are cooked with rice and chickpeas and seasoned with lemon and cumin.

This flavorful and easy one pot chicken and rice recipe is seasoned with bold Mediterranean spices of warm cumin, paprika, turmeric and tart sumac. Add chickpeas for additional texture and protein and finish everything with loads of fresh herbs and bright lemon.

One pot chicken and rice is seasoned with cumin and sumac and cooked with nutty chickpeas and fresh lemon slices.

One pot lovers, unite! This one pot chicken and rice recipe is everything you want in an easy weeknight dinner! For another wonderful One Pot Chicken meal, try my One Pot Chicken Provencal or my Chicken Francese.

Bone in chicken thighs are seasoned with a mixture of bold Mediterranean spices including warm cumin and paprika, turmeric and bright sumac. Once the chicken thighs are seared and browned, they finish cooking in the same pot with fragrant basmati rice and nutty chickpeas. For another wonderful Mediterranean dish try my Mediterranean Crispy Rice Salad.

The results are a tender and flavorful Mediterranean spiced chicken with perfectly cooked rice and savory chickpeas. Pair this one pot chicken dish with chopped salad or homemade tzatziki sauce for a true explosion of flavors!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍋 Why You'll Love this Recipe

  • Bold Mediterranean flavors! Cumin, paprika, bright sumac and fresh lemon zest season the chicken thighs and the flavor combination is delicious!
  • Bone in and skin on chicken thighs ensure that the chicken stays juicy and tender!
  • This one pot chicken and rice is done in nearly 30 minutes!

📋 Ingredients

  • Chicken Thighs: Bone in and skin on chicken thighs have more fat and flavor than chicken breast. When baked in the oven with other grains, the chicken stays juicy and tender and won't dry out.
  • Spices: A mixture of Mediterranean spices including paprika, turmeric, sumac, cumin and a touch of warm allspice bring big flavors to this simple one pot recipe.
  • Fresh Lemon: Both the lemon zest and lemon slices are used in this recipe to offer a bit of brightness to the warmer flavors. Use a microplane to grate the lemon zest.
  • Garlic and Shallot: Shallots are a little milder than onion and offer great flavor. If shallots aren't available, substitute with finely chopped red onion.
  • Basmati Rice: The grains of basmati rice are long and fragrant. If you are looking for a truly delicious and airy basmati rice, my favorite is India Gate Basmati Rice.
  • Chickpeas: A simple can of chickpeas is drained and rinsed and added to the one pot chicken recipe. The chickpeas stay tender and the outside gets ever so crunchy.
  • Chicken Stock: I like using a chicken stock base, such as this one or use your favorite chicken or vegetable stock. If stock isn't available, use water. There is so much flavor in this chicken recipe, it will still be delicious!

⏲️ Instructions

  1. Dry the chicken well with paper towels and season with the spices and lemon zest on all sides.
  2. Bring a wide pan or dutch oven to medium heat and drizzle with olive oil and sear chicken, skin side down until deeply golden brown, about 3-4 minutes, then turn over and cook the other side for another 2-3 minutes.
  3. Remove the chicken and set aside and in the same pan, saute the chopped shallots for 1-2 minutes, then stir in the garlic and saute for another minute.
  4. Add the basmati rice and saute so all the grains are coated with the seasonings. Add the chickpeas and stir to combine.
  5. Nestle the chicken on top of the rice and pour chicken stock around the chicken.
  6. Top the chicken with lemon slices and cover the pan. Place in a 400 degree Fahrenheit oven for 20 minutes, then remove the lid and continue cooking for another 10 minutes.
  7. Once done, remove from the oven and garnish with fresh chopped parsley.
One pot lemon chicken with rice and chickpeas is flavored with Mediterranean spices of sumac and cumin.

🌶️ Substitutions and Variations

  • If chickpeas aren't available, substitute with canned white beans.
  • Boneless chicken thighs will work great, just reduce the cooking time by 3-5 minutes.
  • Add quick cooking spinach or cubed zucchini for extra vegetables.
  • For added heat, add a teaspoon of harissa paste or Aleppo pepper.

Recipe Tip

Rinse the basmati rice before adding it to the recipe. Rinsing the rice cleans up any debris and also removes excess starch, making a lighter and airier result.

Can you cook raw chicken and rice together?

Yes you can. Chicken thighs take about 25-30 minutes to cook with an internal temperature of 165 degrees Fahrenheit. This is the same amount of time it will take the rice to cook and become tender as well.

Can one pot chicken and rice be made ahead of time?

Yes, this can be made up to 3 days in advance. When reheating, add ¼ cup to ½ cup more liquid so the chicken and rice doesn't dry out.

More Flavorful Chicken Recipes to Try

  • Chicken Shawarma Skewers
  • Spanish Chicken Stew
  • Chicken Saltimbocca with Speck
  • Preserved Lemon and Yogurt Marinated Chicken
  • Chicken Puttanesca with Calabrian Chiles
One pot Dutch oven chicken thighs are cooked with rice and chickpeas and seasoned with lemon and cumin.
Print Recipe
5 from 22 votes

One Pot Chicken and Rice with Lemon and Chickpeas

A flavorful and easy one pot chicken and rice recipe that is seasoned with bold Mediterranean spices, chickpeas and fresh lemon.
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time35 minutes mins
Total Time40 minutes mins
Course: Dinner, Main Course
Cuisine: Mediterranean
Keyword: lemon chicken and rice, one pot chicken and rice
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 786kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Equipment

  • Microplane
  • Meat Thermometer
  • Dutch Oven Braiser

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds chicken thighs skin on and bone in
  • 1 teaspoon paprika
  • 1 teaspoon turmeric
  • 1 teaspoon sumac
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon Ground black pepper
  • ½ teaspoon cumin
  • ½ teaspoon allspice
  • 1 lemon zested and sliced thinly
  • Olive oil for drizzling
  • 1 small shallot diced
  • 2 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • 1 cup uncooked basmati rice
  • 15 ounce can chickpeas drained and rinsed
  • 2 cups chicken broth
  • Fresh parsley chopped, for garnish
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Pre heat the oven to 400 degrees Fahrenheit.
  • In a small bowl, add all of the spices, lemon zest and salt and pepper and stir to combine.
  • Dry the chicken thighs very well with paper towels and season the chicken with the spice and lemon zest mixture, making sure all the chicken is generously and evenly coated all over.
  • Bring a wide dutch oven or pan to medium heat and drizzle with olive oil. Sear the chicken, skin side down until deeply golden brown, about 3-4 minutes, then flip over and sear the other side for another 2 minutes.
  • Once done, remove chicken from the pan and reserve to a plate.
  • In the same pan, add the chopped shallots and saute until caramelized and softened for about 2-3 minutes, then add the chopped garlic and saute for another 1-2 minutes until fragrant.
  • Add the basmati rice and saute the rice in the residual fat, so all of the grains are lightly coated with the flavored oil. Add the drained chickpeas and toss together for another minute.
  • Nestle the chicken thighs into the rice and chickpea mixture, skin side up and pour the chicken stock around the chicken. Scatter the lemon slices on top of the chicken.
  • Turn off heat and cover the pot. Then place it into the oven and cook for 20 minutes. Then remove the cover and continue cooking for additional 10 minutes. until the liquid has absorbed and chicken is cooked through.
  • Once done, remove the chicken from oven and garnish everything with fresh chopped parsley.

Notes

Take the time to sear the chicken skin and render the fat to use in sautéing the aromatics and rice. 
Rinse the basmati rice a few times until the water runs clear. This produces a lighter and airier result once the rice is cooked. 
 

Nutrition

Calories: 786kcal | Carbohydrates: 58g | Protein: 47g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 225mg | Sodium: 1493mg | Potassium: 791mg | Fiber: 7g | Sugar: 2g | Vitamin A: 454IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 93mg | Iron: 4mg

Greek Rice Pilaf with Orzo

Jan 27, 2023 · 5 Comments

Greek rice pilaf with orzo and fresh dill.

20 minutes is all you need for the most flavorful and easy side dish! Greek rice pilaf with orzo is flavored with fresh lemon zest, loads of fresh dill and toasted pine nuts and pistachios for extra crunch.

Greek rice pilaf with orzo and dill, fresh lemon and more fresh herbs.

Greek rice pilaf with orzo is a simple rice dish that is all made in one pot and done in nearly 20 minutes! This is the easy side dish I like to make for weeknight dinners alongside herb and citrus roasted salmon or lemon herb roast chicken.

This lemon rice pilaf is flavored with loads of fresh herbs, toasted pine nuts and simmered in a savory broth instead of water, for even more flavor. My next favorite side dish is my Mujadara with Chickpeas, the lentils in this dish are wonderful.

Why You'll Love this Recipe

  • Everything cooks in one pot! The toasted nuts, rice and orzo all cook in the same pot!
  • Cooks in nearly 20 minutes! Making this a perfect side dish for weeknight dinners.
  • Lots of textures and Flavors! The tender orzo, nutty basmati rice and toasted pine nuts give the simple dish big flavors and great textures.

🍋 Ingredients

After a quick scan of the pantry, a few staples produces the most delicious, buttery and nutty rice dish.

  • Ghee and Olive Oil: Both are used to create a lovely depth of flavor. If you are keeping the side dish dairy free, use just olive oil, though I do love the richness that ghee offers.
  • Shallots: Shallots are milder than onions and have great flavor. If shallots aren't available, substitute with ¼ of a red onion.
  • Toasted Pine Nuts and Pistachios: Both gently toasted in the olive oil and ghee mixture. A good substitute would be slivered almonds.
  • Orzo: Orzo is a small shaped pasta that looks similar to rice. Orzo cooks quickly and is common in a Greek ride pilaf.
  • Basmati Rice: Look for long grain basmati rice, which will be lighter and more flavorful. My favorite basmati rice is India Gate, which has long grains and is incredibly light.
  • Fresh Herbs: Fresh dill and parsley give the simple side dish a bright of freshness.
  • Lemon Zest: Both lemon zest and fresh lemon juice give the Greek pilaf a hit of brightness. Use a microplane to grate the lemon zest.
  • Vegetable Stock: Use either vegetable stock or chicken stock to flavor the pilaf. I like using a stock base with condensed flavor.

📋 Instructions

  1. Melt olive oil and ghee over medium heat and saute shallots for 2-3 minutes until the shallots begin to soften.
  2. Add the pine nuts and pistachios and saute for another 2 minutes, tossing the nuts around the olive oil so they toast evenly.
  3. Stir in the garlic and saute for another minute until fragrant.
  4. Add in the basmati rice and orzo and saute so all of the grains are coated with the oil, then add in the lemon zest and lemon juice.
  5. Pour in stock, give everything a good stir and bring up to a boil, then reduce to a simmer. Place the lid on the pot and cook for 15 minutes or until all the liquid as absorbed and the rice and orzo is tender.
  6. Once done, turn off heat and add chopped herbs and fluff everything together with a fork and serve.
Lemon rice pilaf with orzo, dill and pistachios.

Variations

  • Substitute slivered almonds instead of pistachios or pine nuts.
  • For a vegan option, omit ghee and just use olive oil.
  • Substitute other fresh herbs such as mint and basil.

Recipe Tip

Keep an eye when you are toasting the nuts. Use a spatula to move them around and evenly toast the nuts with the oil. As soon as they become fragrant, either remove the toasted nuts or add your next ingredient.

Why is my rice pilaf mushy?

Adding too much liquid or overcooking can cause rice pilaf to become mushy. A good rule of thumb is 2:1, liquid to rice ratio.

Should you wash rice before making pilaf?

You don't have to, but washing the rice removes any excess debris as well as excess starch, making for a fluffier and airier rice. To wash rice, rinse the rise under cool water until the water runs clear.

What to serve with Greek Rice Pilaf

Because the rice pilaf has bold Greek flavors of garlic, dill and pine nuts, it will pair with anything Mediterranean. Serve alongside preserved lemon and yogurt marinated chicken or olive oil braised chicken with citrus and fennel.

15 minutes for the most flavorful side dish. Lemon rice pilaf is cooked with orzo and toasted pine nuts, pistachios and loads of fresh herbs.
Print Recipe
5 from 6 votes

Lemon Rice Pilaf with Dill and Pistachios

20 minutes for the most flavorful side dish. Lemon rice pilaf is cooked with orzo and toasted pine nuts, pistachios and loads of fresh herbs.
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time20 minutes mins
Total Time25 minutes mins
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: Greek, Mediterranean
Keyword: Greek lemon rice, Greek rice pilaf, lemon dill rice, lemon rice pilaf, rice pilaf with orzo
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 466kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $8

Equipment

  • Microplane

Ingredients

  • 2 tablespoon ghee
  • 2 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 small shallot finely chopped
  • ½ cup pine nuts
  • ¼ cup pistachios
  • 2 garlic cloves chopped finely
  • ¾ cup basmati rice
  • ¼ cup orzo
  • 1 lemon zested and juiced
  • 2 cups vegetable or chicken stock
  • Small bunch of fresh dill roughly chopped
  • Small bunch of fresh parsley roughly chopped
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • In a medium sized pot, melt the ghee and olive oil together and add chopped shallots. Saute for 2-3 minutes until the shallots begin to soften.
  • Add the pine nuts and pistachios and saute for another 2 minutes, tossing the nuts around the olive oil so they toast evenly.
  • Add in the garlic and cook for another minute, tossing everything together.
  • Add in the basmati rice and orzo and saute everything together so the rice and orzo get coated with all of the other flavors. Add in the lemon zest and lemon juice and give it another stir.
  • Pour in 2 cups of stock, give everything a good stir once more and bring to a gentle boil, then reduce to a simmer. Place a lid on the pot and cook for 15 minutes or until all the liquid as absorbed and the rice and orzo is tender.
  • Once done, turn off heat and let cool for a few minutes. Then add chopped herbs and fluff with a fork, gently stiring the herbs in the rice and serve.

Notes

Substitute slivered almonds instead of pistachios or pine nuts.
For a vegan option, omit ghee and use just olive oil.
Substitute other fresh herbs such as mint and basil.

Nutrition

Calories: 466kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 30g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 19mg | Sodium: 475mg | Potassium: 298mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 282IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 30mg | Iron: 2mg

Four Cheese Gnocchi Al Forno with Sausage

Jan 25, 2023 · 2 Comments

Weeknight gnocchi al forno topped with burrata and fresh basil.

Creamy and decadent, this gnocchi al forno is everything you want in a comforting and flavorful baked gnocchi recipe! Pillowy potato gnocchi is folded in with Italian sausage, a simple tomato sauce and a four cheese mixture of ricotta, Parmesan, mozzarella and burrata cheese.

Gnocchi al forno with Italian sausage, ricotta and burrata cheese in a Dutch oven braiser.

When it comes to weeknight cooking, I am all for easy, flavorful and comforting recipes (give me a bowl of pasta fagioli any day!). Italian cuisine is one of my favorites, and on a leisurely Sunday afternoon, you may find a simmering pot of meatballs in Sunday gravy on the stove. But on a standard weeknight, simple cheesy baked gnocchi comes to the rescue.

This four cheese gnocchi al forno hits all the spots! Light potato gnocchi is tossed with crumbles of Italian sausage, tomato sauce and a mixture of melty and soft cheeses. And if you happen to have extra cheese leftover (is that such a thing?), stuff them inside a cheese calzone!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🍅 Ingredients

  • Gnocchi: Gnocchi are Italian potato dumplings that can be found in the pasta section of grocery stores. Gnocchi is fantastic in other sauces as well, such as tossed in a bright almond pesto.
  • Italian Sausage: Links of Italian sausage are broken up into crumbles and tossed with the tomato sauce and cheeses. If you like spicy, look for hot Italian sausage, or for a mild flavor, look for sweet Italian sausage.
  • Dried Oregano: Or use a few sprigs of fresh oregano, roughly chopped.
  • Garlic: A few cloves of fresh garlic is finely chopped and added to the browned sausage mixture.
  • Tomato Sauce: This recipe uses canned crushed tomatoes, but use what you have on hand, such as a store bought marinara sauce, passata or tomato puree.
  • Mozzarella Cheese: Cubes of mozzarella are added to the sauce mixture and as the gnocchi bakes, the cheese gently melts and becomes gooey.
  • Ricotta Cheese: Look for dry ricotta or ricotta that is packaged in a basket. This means that the ricotta will be thicker and creamier and not as watery.
  • Parmesan Cheese: A healthy grating of Parmesan cheese is added towards the end of baking. Another option is Pecorino cheese.
  • Burrata Cheese: Burrata is a ball of mozzarella with a very soft cream inside, called stracciatella. Burrata cheese is delicate and I suggest adding this after the baked gnocchi is finished.
  • Fresh Basil: A few leaves of fresh basil brighten up the richer flavors.

See recipe card for quantities.

⏲️ Instructions

Brown the Sausage

  1. Drizzle a wide pan or Dutch oven with a bit of oil and bering up to medium-high heat.
  2. Add the Italian sausage and use a sturdy spatula to break up the sausage.
  3. Cook until halfway cooked, then add chopped garlic and dried oregano and continue cooking until sausage is cooked through and caramelized.
Once the Italian sausage is half way cooked, add the chopped garlic and saute.

Break up the Italian sausage unto crumbled and cook until a nice crust forms on the sausage.

Make the Sauce

  1. Add the tomato sauce to the sausage mixture and stir to combine. Simmer the sauce for 10 minutes so it reduces slightly.
  2. Add the cooked gnocchi to the sauce and stir to combine.
  3. Top with mozzarella cheese, ricotta cheese and grated Parmesan cheese.
Add crushed tomatoes to the browned Italian sausage.

Add cooked gnocchi to the tomato sauce and sausage mixture.

Stir the cooked gnocchi into the sausage and tomato sauce mixture.
Add cubes of mozzarella cheese to the gnocchi, sausage and tomato sauce mixture,

Bake the Gnocchi

  1. Place gnocchi in a 425 degree Fahrenheit oven for 15-20 minutes until the cheese melts and under the broiler for 2-5 minutes for an extra crisp topping.
  2. Remove baked gnocchi from oven and roughly tear burrata cheese on top.
  3. Garnish with fresh basil leaves and serve.
Place gnocchi al forno under the broiler to broil the outside cheese layer.

Variations

  • No Pork: If pork sausage isn't an option, look for an Italian flavored chicken or turkey sausage.
  • Spicy: For added heat, add ½ teaspoon of red pepper flakes to the sausage mixture or a teaspoon of Calabrian chiles.
  • Add Vegetables: Add quick cooking vegetables such as spinach, cubed zucchini or cubed eggplant.
Decadent gnocchi al forno also called baked gnocchi, s garnished with fresh basil leaves and chunks of burrata cheese in a simple tomato sauce.

FAQ

What are gnocchi made of?

Gnocchi are Italian potato dumplings that are soft and pillowy. Typically, gnocchi is made up of mashed potatoes, semolina flour and egg.

Can you make gnocchi al forno ahead of time?

Gnocchi al forno is great to make ahead up to 3 days in advance and tastes better as it sits. If making ahead, add the burrata cheese and fresh basil after reheating.

What to Serve with Gnocchi Al Forno

  • Homemade Caesar Salad
  • Garlic and Herb Focaccia
  • Pesto Broccolini
  • Italian Peppers and Onions
Weeknight gnocchi al forno topped with burrata and fresh basil.
Print Recipe
5 from 5 votes

Four Cheese Gnocchi Al Forno with Sausage

Decadent cheesy gnocchi al forno is layered with savory Italian sausage and a cheesy mixture of ricotta, Parmesan, mozzarella and burrata cheese.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time40 minutes mins
Total Time50 minutes mins
Course: Main
Cuisine: Italian
Keyword: baked gnocchi al forno, gnocchi al forno, gnocchi al forno with sausage
Servings: 8 servings
Calories: 522kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Equipment

  • Dutch Oven Braiser

Ingredients

  • 1 tablespoon olive oil
  • 1 pound gnocchi
  • 1 pound Italian sausage
  • 3 garlic cloves finely chopped
  • 1 teaspoon dried oregano
  • 28 ounce can crushed tomatoes
  • 8 ounces mozzarella cut into ½ inch cubes or shredded
  • 1 cup whole milk ricotta cheese
  • ½ cup grated Parmesan cheese
  • 4 ounces burrata cheese
  • Fresh basil leaves
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees Fahrenheit and bring a pot of salted water to a boil.
  • Once boiling, add the gnocchi and cook until the gnocchi float to the top, about 8 minutes. Then drain gnocchi, and set aside.
  • Place a wide Dutch oven or pan on medium high heat and drizzle with olive oil. Add the Italian sausage and use a sturdy spatula to break up the sausage.
  • Once the sausage is halfway cooked, add the chopped garlic and dried oregano and continue cooking until the sausage is cooked through and outside is caramelized.
  • Add the tomato sauce to the sausage and stir together and continue simmering for 10 minutes, so the sauce reduces slightly. Then add the cooked gnocchi to the sausage and stir to combine.
  • Scatter cubes of mozzarella cheese onto the sauce and top with dollops of ricotta cheese and grating of Parmesan cheese.
  • Please gnocchi al forno in the oven and cook until the cheese melts, about 15 to 20 minutes and then place under the broiler for another 3 to 5 minutes for an extra crisp top.
  • Remove gnocchi from the oven and top with roughly torn burrata cheese and a fresh basil leaves.

Video

Notes

If pork isn't available, substitute with Italian flavored chicken or turkey sausage. 
Gnocchi al forno makes greta leftovers and reheats very well. Store for up to 3 days. 
If making ahead, reserve the burrata until it has been reheated. 

Nutrition

Calories: 522kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 26g | Fat: 34g | Saturated Fat: 16g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Cholesterol: 97mg | Sodium: 1051mg | Potassium: 504mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 695IU | Vitamin C: 11mg | Calcium: 395mg | Iron: 4mg

Turkish Red Lentil Soup with Mint and Lemon (Mercimek Çorbasi)

Jan 23, 2023 · 23 Comments

Turkish lentil soup with rice, mint and lemon.

Full of bold flavors of smoked paprika, bright mint and fresh lemon, this Turkish red lentil soup will hit all of your taste buds! Turkish lentil soup is full of hearty grains such as lentils and rice and is gluten free and made in nearly 30 minutes!

Turkish lentil soup garnished with fresh mint and lemon.

If you are looking for a truly impressive, yet simple soup with bold flavors, you will fall in love with Turkish red lentil soup (also called mercimek çorbas in Turkish).

Flavors of smoked paprika, earthy mint and fresh lemon transform a humble grain soup into something extraordinary!

This recipe is adapted from a fantastic Turkish cookbook called, The Sultans Kitchen. If you are looking to dive into Turkish cuisine, I highly recommend this cookbook!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

A Quick Story

We were first introduced to this lentil soup on our trip to Istanbul. On our food tour, the host took us to this small tucked away kitchen behind the bazaar. If you blinked, you would walk right passed it. But alas, as we tucked under the markets merchandise, there was a single woman serving up only this simple Turkish lentil soup.

I will never forget this experience because it was so out of the ordinary. We sat on weak plastic chairs on a fold away table and I remember seeing hanging sheets and shirts from the sellers in the market.

The lentil soup was served simply in a bland soup bowl and garnished with lemon and lots of freshly torn bread. I remember the smokiness from the paprika and the brightness from the freshly squeezed lemon. The combination is out of this world and at the first bite, I was mesmerized at how such a simple soup could express such bold flavors!

🥣 Why You'll Love Turkish Lentil Soup

  • So much flavor! Smoked paprika, dried mint and fresh lemon create a symphony of bold flavors!
  • Gluten Free! The soup is made full of hearty grains, including rice, quinoa and lentils that give the soup body and happen to be gluten free.
  • Great to make ahead! Turkish lentil soup holds up very well and freezes well too. Make a large batch and freeze half for when you are craving something comforting.

🍅 Ingredients

This simple lentil soup is full of some fantastically bold flavors and hearty grains. There are a lot of ingredients, but everything cooks down in nearly 30 minutes and will taste like the soup has been cooking for hours!

  • Red Lentils: Cooks in 30 minutes and blends up beautifully, making this a slightly creamy soup.
  • Rice and Quinoa: Both gluten free and add thickness and texture to the lentil soup. The original recipe uses bulgur which you can add as well.
  • Onions, Garlic, Red Bell Pepper and Tomato: Aromatics to start the soup off, feel free to substitute shallots, leeks or orange bell pepper.
  • Tomato Paste: Brings a bit of depth and sweetness to the soup. If you can find red pepper paste, which is more accessible in Turkey, use that.
  • Smoked Paprika: This is what really bright the Turkish lentil soup to life and I love the additional smokiness the spice offers. if you don't like the smoke flavor, use sweet paprika.
  • Dried mint: Potent and bright and works so well with the smoky paprika. You can find dried mint online or you can use fresh mint, but the dried herb has a more direct flavor.
  • Stock: Use a flavorful chicken stock or vegetable stock or you can make your own with this great tutorial on how to make vegetable stock.
  • Lemon: Fresh is best and the brightness of fresh lemon juice at the end wakes up all of the other robust flavors. Lemon zest is also sautéed with the other aromatics.
Turkish red lentil soup is made with red lentils, rice, quinoa and garnished with mint and lemon.

⏲️ Instructions

  1. In a large pot, add the butter and olive oil and saute the chopped onion and red bell pepper until pepper is tender, then saute garlic for another minute.
  2. Add the dried mint, smoked paprika and Turkish red pepper (or you can substitute regular red pepper and stir spices together in the oil.
  3. Stir in the tomato paste, chopped tomato and lemon zest and saute.
  4. Add the dried red lentils, white rice and red quinoa and saute to coat the grains with the other flavors.
  5. Add 8 cups of vegetable broth and bring soup to a boil Cook the soup for about 30 minutes until rice, lentils and quinoa are tender. Taste for doneness and seasoning.
  6. Once soup is cooked, you can use an immersion blender to puree some of the soup for a better texture.
  7. Garnish with a squeeze of lemon, olive oil, fresh herbs.

Substitutions and Variations

  • Red or orange lentils will work for this recipe since both cook down fairly quickly.
  • To make the soup vegan, omit the butter and use only olive oil.
  • This can be made in the slow cooker as well! Cook the recipe as written and add soup to the slow cooker on low for 6 hours and blend the soup at the end of cooking.

Recipe Tip

What makes Turkish red lentil soup so delicious, is the creamy texture. To blend the soup, use either an immersion blender or ladle a few cups of the soup in a blender and blend until smooth. Keep some of the texture and only blend half of the soup.

Do you have to soak lentils before making soup?

Red lentils cook very quickly and don't need to be soaked before cooking. Just add the lentils along with the broth and cook until tender.

Can you freeze red lentil soup?

Yes, Turkish red lentil soup stores and freezes very well. Store the soup in a sealed container, leaving some room for expansion and freeze for up to 2 months.

More Turkish Recipes to Try

  • Spinach and Feta Borek
  • Turkish Pide
  • Lahmacun with Herb Tahini (Turkish Flatbread)
  • Turkish Sumac Onions

More Soups To Try

  • Roasted tomato soup with cheesy matzo balls and basil.
    Roasted Tomato Soup with Ricotta Parmesan Matzo Balls
  • Peruvian Cilantro and Turkey Soup (Aguadito de Cava)
  • French Onion Soup with Challah Croutons
  • Vegetable Green Curry Soup
Turkish lentil soup with rice, mint and lemon.
Print Recipe
4.95 from 20 votes

Turkish Red Lentil Soup

Full of bold flavors of smoked paprika, mint and lemon, this Turkish lentil soup is full of hearty grains such as lentils and rice and is gluten free and made in nearly 30 minutes.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time40 minutes mins
Total Time50 minutes mins
Course: Main, Soup
Cuisine: Mediterranean, Middle Eastern, Turkish
Keyword: red lentil soup, Turkish lentil soup, Turkish red lentil soup
Servings: 6 servings
Calories: 270kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Equipment

  • Microplane
  • Immersion Blender

Ingredients

  • ½ red onion diced
  • 1 red bell pepper seeds removed and diced
  • 2 garlic cloves chopped finely
  • 2 tablesopoons butter or ghee
  • 2 tablespoons olive oil + more for garnish
  • 1 tablespoon dried mint
  • 1 tablespoon smoked paprika
  • ½ teaspoon Turkish red pepper or other red pepper
  • 2 tablespoons tomato paste
  • 1 medium sized tomato chopped and seeds removed
  • 1 lemon zested (about 1-2 Tb of zest) + lemon wedges for garnish
  • 1 cup dried red lentils
  • ¼ cup basmati rice
  • ¼ cup red quinoa or other quinoa, but black will take longer to cook
  • 6 cups vegetable broth
  • Fresh herbs for garnish parsley, mint and/or chives
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • In a large pot, add the butter and olive oil and saute the chopped onion and red bell pepper until the pepper is tender, about 5-8 minutes. Then add the chopped garlic and saute until fragrant, for another minute
  • Add the dried mint, paprika and Turkish red pepper (or you can substitute regular red pepper and stir the spices together in the oil
  • Stir in the tomato paste, chopped tomato and lemon zest and season with salt and pepper. Allow the tomatoes to cook for 1-2 minutes to soften.
  • Add the dried red lentils, white rice and red quinoa and stir all of the grains together so the flavors coat all of the grains.
  • Add 6 cups of vegetable broth and bring the soup to a boil. Once boiling, bring down to a strong simmer and cook the soup for about 30 minutes until rice, lentils and quinoa are tender. Taste for doneness and seasoning and adjust as needed.
  • Once soup is cooked, turn off the heat use an immersion blender to puree some of the soup for a smoother texture.
  • Ladle the soup into bowls and garnish with a squeeze of lemon, drizzle of olive oil, top with fresh herbs.

Notes

  • Either red or orange lentils will work for this recipe since both cook down fairly quickly.
  • To blend the soup, use either an immersion blender or ladle soup in a blender. I like some texture and chose to not blend it all the way.
  • This can be made in the slow cooker as well! Do the recipe as written and add soup to the slow cooker on low for 6 hours.
  • To make this lentil soup vegan, just omit the butter and use only olive oil.
Recipe inspired by The Sultan's Kitchen Cookbook

Nutrition

Calories: 270kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 8g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.01g | Cholesterol: 1mg | Sodium: 125mg | Potassium: 760mg | Fiber: 12g | Sugar: 4g | Vitamin A: 1551IU | Vitamin C: 41mg | Calcium: 53mg | Iron: 4mg

Hawaiian Macaroni Salad

Jan 21, 2023 · 9 Comments

Creamy Hawaiian macaroni salad with carrot, onion and Best Foods mayo.

If you have ever been to Hawaii and had a "plate lunch", you know how creamy and delicious Hawaiian macaroni salad is! Creamy and slightly sweet, Hawaii's mac salad is a comfort food favorite!

Authentic Hawaiian mac salad with grated carrot and onion.

Growing up in Hawaii, plate lunch is part of the culture and there are a few key components to a delicious plate lunch. The protein, such as shoyu chicken or kalbi ribs, a scoop of white rice and another scoop of Hawaiian style macaroni salad. Or as the locals call it, "mac salad". This wonderful Mac Salad is a great addition to my Seared Furikake Ahi which brings this wonderful fish to a new level.

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🤙 What is Hawaiian Mac Salad

Hawaiian mac salad is an integral part of the food culture of Hawaii and many locals have their own macaroni salad recipe. Though mac salad is not Hawaiian food, it is said to have been brought over by the plantation owners who came from Europe.

These days, this creamy macaroni salad is a staple of local food in Hawaii. And there are a few key ingredients and tips that make for a delicious or "ono" (delicious in Hawaiian), authentic macaroni salad.

An authentic Hawaiian style macaroni salad recipe has to be incredibly creamy, savory and slight sweet with no large or crunchy pieces. Therefore the simple ingredients of carrots and onion are finely grated and mixed into the mac salad very well.

📋 Ingredients

Hawaiian macaroni salad is simple and has a handful of ingredients. There are variations that are added, such as tuna or hard boiled eggs as well. But the star of the show is creamy and thick Best Foods Mayonaise.

Ingredients for Hawaiian mac salad include Best Foods mayonnaise.
  • Elbow Macaroni: This is the classic shape of local style mac salad. The small shape of the elbow noodles soaks up the mayonaise, making a creamy result.
  • Best Foods Mayonnaise: If you asked any local in Hawaii what mayonnaise is best, they will say Best Foods. It's thick and creamy and the flavor is iconic. The sister brand is Hellman's mayonnaise, which is the same product.
  • Grated Carrot: Grating a carrot is worth the step to achieve the right texture. Use the large holes of a box grater. The carrot also gives a bit of sweetness to the mac salad.
  • Grated Onion: If you can find a sweet onion or sweet Maui onion, use that. If not, a yellow or white onion would work great. Grate the onion so there are no large pieces to bite into.
  • Sugar: A touch of white sugar gives the entire mac salad a bit of sweetness.
  • Vinegar: To counter the sweetness from the sugar and carrot, a touch of apple cider vinegar or rice wine vinegar adds a layer of brightness to the decadent macaroni salad.
  • Salt and Pepper: Taste as you go and adjust as needed. I like a lot of black pepper in my mac salad but start small and add more as you taste.

See recipe card for quantities.

⏲️ Instructions

  1. Cook elbow macaroni fully, drain and rinse under cold water and let the macaroni cool completely.
  2. Once cooled, add the macaroni to a large bowl along with the grated carrot, grated onion, mayonaise, vinegar, sugar, salt and pepper and stir to combine very well.
  3. Cover the macaroni salad with plastic wrap and place in the refrigerator for at least 1 hour, so the flavors can blend.
  4. Once the mac salad is chilled, taste for seasoning and adjust as needed. Garnish with chives if preferred and serve.
To the cooked macaroni noodles, add Best Foods mayo, grated carrot, grated onion and a bit of sugar.

Step 1. Add the cooked and cooled macaroni, grated carrot, grated onion, mayonaise, sugar, vinegar, salt and pepper to a large bowl and stir to combine.

In a large bowl, mix the cooked macaroni with the mayonnaise, grated carrot and grated onion.

Step 2. Once mixed, chill the mac salad in the refrigerator for at least 1 hour so all the flavors come together. taste for seasoning and add adjust, as needed.

Recipe Tip:

As the macaroni salad settles, it will soak up the mayonnaise and other flavors and change the flavor slightly from when it's first mixed. Once it's chilled, taste for seasoning and adjust as needed.

🌺 Variations

There are a few variations for Hawaiian mac salad and depending on where you go in Hawaii, you'll see one or more of these styles.

  • Hard Boiled Eggs: Chop 3-4 hard boiled eggs and add that to the macaroni salad when you are mixing everything together.
  • Potato Mac Salad: Peel russet potatoes and cut them into small ¼ inch to ½ inch cubes and boil until incredibly tender and cooked through. Then chill the potatoes and add them to the macaroni salad along with the mayonaise, carrots and onion and stir to combine.
  • Canned Tuna: Hawaiian macaroni salad with tuna is another very popular variation. But it has to be the tuna in oil, for the best flavor!
  • Fried Spam: Cut slices of spam and fry until golden brown and crisp on the outside. Then cut into small cubes add add to the macaroni salad.
Bowl full of creamy Hawaiian mac salad.

Storage

Keep macaroni salad in an air tight container or sealed bowl with plastic wrap and in the fridge. Macaroni salad will last up to 4 days and gets better as it sits.

FAQ

How do you keep macaroni salad from absorbing too much mayonnaise?

Make sure to chill the cooked macaroni noodles fully so it doesn't absorb too much mayonnaise at first. As the macaroni settles, it will absorb some of the mayonnaise, but not as much when chilled.

Should you rinse the macaroni noodles?

Yes, once the macaroni noodles are cooked, drain and rinse under cold water to stop the cooking and rinse away any excess starch. Then chill the macaroni fully and once chilled, stir the mayonaise in.

More Hawaiian Recipes to Try

These are my favorite dishes to serve with Hawaiian Macaroni Salad

  • Chicken Katsu
  • Hoisin Pork Sliders with Kimchi
  • Shoyu Poke
Creamy Hawaiian macaroni salad with carrot, onion and Best Foods mayo.
Print Recipe
4.90 from 19 votes

Hawaiian Macaroni Salad

Hawaiian macaroni salad is local style comfort food! This easy macaroni salad is creamy and simply made with carrot, onion and mayonnaise.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time10 minutes mins
Chilling1 hour hr 30 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 50 minutes mins
Course: Side Dish
Cuisine: Hawaiian
Keyword: hawaiian mac salad, Hawaiian macaroni salad
Servings: 8 servings
Calories: 503kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $5

Equipment

  • Nesting Bowls

Ingredients

  • 1 pound elbow macaroni
  • 1 ½ cups mayonnaise Hellmans or Best Foods
  • ½ cup grated carrot
  • ¼ cup grated onion yellow, white or sweet onion
  • 1 teaspoon white sugar
  • 1 teaspoon apple cider vinegar
  • 1 teaspoon Kosher salt
  • ½ teaspoon ground black pepper + more if needed
  • Chives finely chopped, for garnish
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Boil the macaroni noodles in a large pot of water until cooked through according to box directions, about 8 minutes.
  • Once cooked, drain the noodles and run the noodles under cold water to stop the cooking.
  • Transfer the cooked noodles to a bowl and refrigerate until completely chilled, about 30 minutes.
  • Once the noodles are chilled, add the mayonnaise, grated carrot, grated onion, sugar, vinegar, salt and pepper and stir to combine very well.
  • Taste for seasoning, though the flavor will change slightly after it's chilled further.
  • Place a sheet of plastic wrap over the bowl and chill in the refrigerator so the flavors can blend together, for at least 1 hour.
  • Taste for seasoning again and adjust as needed. Garnish with chives, if deserved and serve.

Video

Notes

Don't go too heavy with the mayonaise at first, because as the macaroni salad sits, it will absorb the mayonaise mixture. 
the macaroni salad will change slightly in flavor from when it's first mixed to after it's chilled, so taste for seasoning both times and adjust as needed. 
Macaroni salad tastes better as it sits and will last in the fridge for up to 4 days. 
 
 

Nutrition

Calories: 503kcal | Carbohydrates: 44g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 19g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 18mg | Sodium: 567mg | Potassium: 169mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 3g | Vitamin A: 1365IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg

Hawaiian Style Shoyu Chicken

Jan 20, 2023 · 5 Comments

Sticky Hawaiian shoyu chicken thighs with rice and mac salad.

Local style Hawaiian shoyu chicken is Hawaii's comfort food! Chicken simmers in a flavorful shoyu base with garlic and ginger until incredibly tender with sweet and savory flavors. Serve shoyu chicken with white rice and creamy mac salad for a truly "ono" Hawaiian style plate lunch!

Hawaiian shoyu chicken served on top of rice with mac salad and salad.

Growing up in Hawaii, I ate my weight in shoyu poke and cucumber kimchi, but when I am craving Hawaiian comfort food, it's always sweet and savory shoyu chicken! For a sweet taste of Hawaii try my Lilikoi Cheesecake Tart.

Shoyu chicken is easy and quick and uses a handful of pantry staples. You'll find shoyu chicken all over Hawaii! Everywhere from local plate lunch spots and restaurants, to family recipes and potlucks and even in the hot food section of grocery stores. Shoyu chicken is truly a Hawaii local favorite!

[feast_advanced_jump_to]

🤙 Why You'll Love This Recipe!

  • Shoyu chicken is quick to put together and easy enough to make on a weeknight!
  • Uses every day pantry staples, such as shoyu, brown sugar and garlic.
  • Simple with lots of flavors! Sweet, savory, salty and aromatic!
  • You can't really mess up shoyu chicken! Chopped or crushed garlic, sliced or chopped ginger, add it in and it will still be delicious or as we say, "ono"!

🧄 Ingredients

Shoyu chicken is one of those recipes where you use what you have. But if you want the real deal, use Aloha Shoyu! It's one of the popular shoyu brands used all throughout Hawaii and especially in shoyu chicken.

  • Chicken Thighs: Both skinless and skin on chicken thighs can be used and bone in or boneless thighs. If using boneless chicken thighs, reduce the cooking time by a few minutes
  • Shoyu: Shoyu is Japanese soy sauce and Aloha Shoyu is a brand of soy space that is often used in shoyu chicken. Shoyu is milder and a little sweeter than other styles of soy sauce.
  • Ginger: Not much prep is needed, just slice the fresh ginger and add it to the shoyu mixture.
  • Garlic: You can either chop, slice or smash the garlic cloves and add it right into the shoyu mixture to infuse.
  • Water: Because there is a lot of shoyu being used in the recipe, water is important so the sauce doesn't get too salty. As the chicken cooks in the sauce, it will reduce and become saltier, so water is an important ingredient in this recipe.
  • Brown Sugar: Shoyu chicken is known to have a sweet and savory flavor and a little brown sugar is added to add a layer of sweetness. You can also use honey or regular sugar is brown sugar isn't available.
  • Green Onions: Add 1 chopped green onion to the shoyu broth and another for garnish.
  • Corn Starch: This is optional, but if your sauce is too thin, add a teaspoon of cornstarch to thicken the sauce up a bit.

See recipe card for quantities.

⏲️ Instructions

Assemble and Cook

  1. In medium sized pot, add the shoyu, water, brown sugar, sliced ginger, chopped garlic and green onion and stir to combine. This is a good time to taste and adjust as needed.
  2. Add the chicken to the shoyu mixture and bring up to a low boil. Continue cooking the chicken for 35-45 minutes, until the chicken is cooked through and tender.
Add skin on and bone in chicken pieces to the shoyu sauce.
Cook the chicken thighs in the shoyu sauce until the chicken is cooked through.

Broil Chicken (Optional)

  1. Once the chicken is done, remove the chicken to a foil lined baking sheet and place the chicken skin side up.
  2. Place the chicken under the broiler for 2-3 minutes to crisp up the skin. Keep an eye on it and make sure it's not burning too quickly.
Place the cooked shoyu chicken on a sheet pan and broil, skin side up to crisp the skin.
Broil shoyu chicken under the broiler to crisp up the skin.

Thicken Sauce

  1. If shoyu sauce is thin, whisk cornstarch and some of the hot shoyu broth in a bowl and add back to the shoyu mixture. Continue cooking on a simmer until the sauce slightly thickens.
  2. Once the chicken is done, spoon the chickened shoyu sauce on top of the chicken and serve.
Cook shoyu sauce with cornstarch until slightly thickened.

Variations

Shoyu Chicken is highly customizable. Here is a few ideas to change it up a bit.

  • Spicy: Add 1-2 teaspoons of sriracha or sambal for extra spice in the sauce or serve once it's cooked.
  • Grilled: Not exactly traditional, but use the same marinade and grill the chicken on a grill or in a grill pan.
  • Slow Cooker: Cook shoyu chicken in the slow cooker on low for 5-6 hours until the chicken is tender. Then place the chicken, skin side up under the broiler to crisp up the skin.
Easy Hawaiian style shoyu chicken served on top of rice with macaroni salad and green salad.

FAQ

What does shoyu chicken taste like?

Shoyu chicken has ingredients of ginger, garlic, brown sugar and shoyu, giving it both a salty, savory and slightly sweet flavor.

Can you make shoyu chicken in the slow cooker?

Yes, add the chicken and the shoyu mixture to the slow cooker and cook on low for 5-6 hours, until the chicken is cooked through. Then place the chicken, skin side up under the broiler to crisp up, if desired.

How to Serve Shoyu Chicken

In Hawaii, you'll find shoyu chicken just about everywhere! Serve chicken on top of cooked white rice, with macaroni salad on the side and a green salad.

More Hawaiian style recipes to try

  • Hoisin Pulled Pork Sliders on Hawaiian Rolls
  • Poke nachos is a fun twist of cultural flavors. Seasoned Ahi poke is layered onto of baked wonton chips and garnished with a drizzle of sriracha, Japanese mayo, cubed avocado, fresh cilantro leaves and thinly sliced jalapeno.
    Poke Nachos
  • Creamy Hawaiian macaroni salad with carrot, onion and Best Foods mayo.
    Hawaiian Macaroni Salad
  • Grilled Korean short ribs with rice and kimchi.
    Kalbi Beef (Korean Beef Short Ribs)

Even more Hawaiian inspiration

  • Passion Fruit Margarita with Li Hing Mui
  • Chicken Katsu
  • Homemade Taro Chips
Sticky Hawaiian shoyu chicken thighs with rice and mac salad.
Print Recipe
5 from 11 votes

Hawaiian Shoyu Chicken

Hawaiian shoyu chicken is flavored with garlic and ginger and simmered until incredibly tender. Serve with cooked white rice and mac salad.
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time45 minutes mins
Broil5 minutes mins
Total Time55 minutes mins
Course: Main Course
Cuisine: Asian, Hawaiian
Keyword: Hawaiian shoyu chicken, shoyu chicken, shoyu chicken recipe
Servings: 4 servings
Calories: 582kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Equipment

  • Dutch Oven

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds chicken thighs bone in, skin on
  • ¾ cup shoyu
  • ½ cup water
  • ¼ cup brown sugar
  • 1 inch piece of ginger sliced
  • 3 garlic cloves chopped
  • 1 green onion chopped + more for garnish
  • Cooked white rice for serving
  • 1 teaspoon cornstarch
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Pat the chicken dry very well and remove any excess fat or skin, if necessary.
  • In medium sized pot, add the shoyu, water, brown sugar, sliced ginger, chopped garlic and green onion and stir to combine. This is a good time to taste and adjust as needed.
  • Add the chicken to the shoyu mixture and bring up to a low boil. Continue cooking the chicken for 35-45 minutes, until the chicken is cooked through and tender.
  • Once the chicken is done, remove to a foil lined baking sheet and place chicken skin side up.
  • Place the chicken under the broiler for 2-3 minutes to crisp up the skin. Keep an eye on it and make sure it's not burning too quickly.
  • Meanwhile, if shoyu sauce is thin, whisk cornstarch and some of the hot shoyu broth in a bowl and add back to the shoyu mixture. Continue cooking on a simmer until the sauce slightly thickens.
  • Once the chicken is done, plate the chicken on top of cooked white rice and spoon thickened shoyu sauce on top of the chicken. Garnish with chopped green onions and serve.

Video

Notes

Cooked shoyu chicken lasts in the refrigerator for up to 2 days and is great for leftovers. 
Keep this recipe easier by not chopping the garlic or peeling the ginger, just add it to the shoyu broth!
For lower sodium, use low sodium shoyu. 
Before adding the chicken, taste the shoyu mixture and add more brown sugar or other aromatics, if preferred. 

Nutrition

Calories: 582kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 41g | Fat: 38g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 16g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 222mg | Sodium: 2806mg | Potassium: 716mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 14g | Vitamin A: 207IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 53mg | Iron: 2mg

Thai Coconut Curry Mussels

Jan 17, 2023 · 5 Comments

Coconut curry mussels in a creamy coconut broth with fresh lime as garnish.

Thai inspired coconut curry mussels are loaded with bold flavors of ginger, red curry paste and fresh herbs. The broth becomes creamy and flavorful and once you dip the mussel into the aromatic coconut curry broth, you won't be able to stop at just one!

Steamed mussels in a coconut curry broth with lime and fresh herbs.
[feast_advanced_jump_to]

Inspired by some of my favorite Thai flavors, these coconut curry mussels are layered with intense flavors of ginger and garlic and a touch of fish sauce for added umami.

I could, whole heartedly devour the entire bowl and dare I say, these are the best coconut curry mussels ever! The sauce slightly thickens from the coconut milk and all of the savory and slightly sweet layers are finished with fresh and bright lime juice and cilantro. Truly a flavor explosion in every single bite! If you would like a loser sauce, add some ½ a cup of homemade seafood stock for a broth like sauce.

Why You'll Love this Recipe

  • Layers of bold flavors! From the ginger, garlic, creamy coconut milk and bright fresh lime juice and herbs.
  • Mussels are quick to prepare and cook in under 10 minutes!
  • This one is for the seafood lovers! If you love recipes such as steamed clams with white wine or classic cioppino, you will love all the flavors in these steamed Thai mussels!

📋 Ingredients

This recipe would be fantastic with other seafood as well, such as clams or shrimp. Use the broth ingredients as a guideline and add more sweet or saltiness as preferred.

  • Coconut Oil: This is used to saute the aromatics and works well with the coconut milk. Other options are a neutral oil such as avocado oil or grapeseed oil.
  • Mussels: Look for fresh mussels without any cracks in the shell. Mussels should be cooked the same day they are bought and always kept cold. More on how to clean mussels below.
  • Shallot, Garlic and Ginger: Aromatics to get the dish going. You could also substitute the shallot for red onion or sweet onion.
  • Red Curry Paste: I took help from the store and used Thai Red Curry Paste which has great flavor. Green curry paste would work great too.
  • Coconut Milk: For creaminess and richness. Use a full fat coconut milk, which will ultimately make for a creamier coconut curry broth.
  • Fish Sauce: Just a few drops of fish sauce gives the entire dish a lovely savoriness and saltiness that goes so well with the other flavors.
  • Brown Sugar: Or you could use palm sugar, but brown sugar is easily accessible and just a bit of sweetness, and again, layers so swell with the other savory and salty flavors.
  • Fresh Herbs and Lime: Fresh cilantro and mint leaves are added as a finishing touch. Thai basil would be a great addition as well.

💦 How to Clean Mussels

Mussels take longer to clean then to cook, but it is very important to take the time to clean the mussels well. Once that's done, steaming the mussels is a breeze.

  1. Once you bring home the mussels from the store, remove them from the bag and place the mussels on top of ice in a large bowl and keep them cold in the refrigerator.
  2. When ready to cook, use a Shellfish scrubber or something similar and scrub each mussel under cold water.
  3. Each mussel has a "beard", which is how the mussel holds onto rocks in the water and needs to be removed before cooking. Use a towel and pull off each beard.
  4. Place the cleaned mussels in ice cold water until ready to cook.
  5. Discard any mussels with cracked or broken shells and mussels that don't open/close when tapped gently.

🥘 How to Make Coconut Curry Mussels

Once the mussels are all cleaned and you've gathered all your ingredients, everything else is pretty quick.

Mussels cook in less then 10 minutes, which makes them a perfect weeknight meal.

  1. Place a pot over medium heat and melt the coconut oil. Add the shallot and saute for 1-2 minutes, then add the ginger and garlic and cook for another minute.
  2. Stir in curry paste and pour in the coconut milk and stir everything together. Add the brown sugar and fish sauce and give the curry sauce one more stir.
  3. Add the cleaned mussels to the coconut curry broth and gently stir the mussels into the broth so they are coated with the sauce. Place a lid on the pot and cook until the mussels just open up, about 6-7 minutes.
  4. Once done, plate the coconut curry mussels into wide bowls and pour the broth on top and garnish with fresh herbs and lime.
Steamed mussels in a bowl of coconut curry broth with fresh mint and cilantro.

Variations

  • Spicy: Add a teaspoon of sriracha or sambal for added heat.
  • Other Aromatics: Add a few pieces of lemongrass or kefir lime leaves for an additional citrus flavor. If using lemongrass, gently pound on the stalk to release the flavors.
  • Other Proteins: Instead of mussels, substitute with shrimp or clams or even salmon and make a flavorful salmon curry.

📍Recipe Tip

  • When soaking the mussels, add a teaspoon of flour or salt to the water. This will help the mussels spit out any sand or debris.
How long should you steam mussels?

Once cleaned, mussels cook very quickly! Whether you are steaming mussels or boiling, mussels cook in about 6-7 minutes, just until the shells open up.

More Seafood Recipes to Try

  • Lobster boil party with whole Main lobsters over boiled potatoes, corn and sausage.
    How to Host a Lobster Boil Party
  • Grilled shrimp skewers with olives and preserved lemon.
    Grilled Shrimp Skewers with Preserved Lemon & Olives
  • Zarandeado fish is flavored with guajillo chili, garlic, onion and mayo and grilled until just cooked through.
    Zarandeado Fish (Mexican Grilled Fish with Chile Sauce)
  • This salmon shawarma salad is full of bold flavors with a spiced salmon filet on top of bright greens.
    Salmon Shawarma Salad
  • Seafood and Chorizo Paella
  • Steamed Clams with Corn and Tomatoes
  • Clams in Green Sauce
Coconut curry mussels in a creamy coconut broth with fresh lime as garnish.
Print Recipe
5 from 16 votes

Thai Coconut Curry Mussels

Steamed coconut curry mussels layered with Thai inspired flavors of red curry paste, ginger, garlic garlic and creamy coconut milk.
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Total Time45 minutes mins
Course: Appetizer, Main
Cuisine: Asian
Keyword: coconut curry mussels, coconut mussels, red curry mussels
Servings: 2 servings
Calories: 757kcal
Author: Samantha Ferraro
Cost: $10

Equipment

  • Dutch Oven

Ingredients

  • 2 pounds mussels
  • 2 tablespoons coconut oil
  • 1 medium sized shallot diced
  • 2 large garlic cloves chopped finely
  • 1 teaspoon grated or chopped ginger
  • 3 tablespoons red curry paste
  • 13 ounce can of full fat coconut milk
  • ½ teaspoon fish sauce
  • 1 tablespoons brown sugar
  • ¼ cup fresh cilantro leaves for garnish
  • ¼ cup fresh mint leaves for garnish
  • 1 lime cut into wedges, for serving
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Place a pot over medium heat and melt the coconut oil.
  • Add the chopped shallot and saute for 1-2 minutes to soften, then add the ginger and garlic and saute for another minute.
  • Stir the curry paste into the oil and pour in the coconut milk and give the sauce a good stir. Add the brown sugar and fish sauce and give the curry sauce one more stir. This is a good time to taste for seasoning and adjust as needed.
  • Add the cleaned mussels to the coconut curry broth and gently stir the mussels into the broth so they are coated with the sauce. Place a lid on the pot and cook until the mussels just open up, about 6-7 minutes.
  • Once done, plate the mussels into wide bowls and pour the broth on top.
  • Garnish with fresh herbs and lime and serve immediately.

Video

Notes

Discard any mussels that don't open or that have cracked shells.
Other aromatics to add: lemongrass, kefir lime leaves, green onions.
For another Seafood recipe with an Italian Spin, try my Halibut Piccata.

Nutrition

Calories: 757kcal | Carbohydrates: 29g | Protein: 33g | Fat: 60g | Saturated Fat: 48g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 65mg | Sodium: 811mg | Potassium: 1292mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 4305IU | Vitamin C: 36mg | Calcium: 167mg | Iron: 17mg
  • « Go to Previous Page
  • Page 1
  • Interim pages omitted …
  • Page 3
  • Page 4
  • Page 5
  • Page 6
  • Page 7
  • Interim pages omitted …
  • Page 15
  • Go to Next Page »

Primary Sidebar

Samantha Ferraro twirling pasta headshot.

Hi, I'm Samantha! I started this blog for my love of world cuisine and cultural flavors! You’ll find everything here from Jewish recipes, Middle Eastern, Italian and more!

More about me →

Fall Favorites

  • Julia Child's creamy potato leek soup with fresh thyme and olive oil on top.
    Julia Child's Creamy Potato Leek Soup
  • Pearled couscous with colorful roasted vegetables.
    Israeli Couscous Salad with Roasted Vegetables
  • Spanish inspired chicken stew with olives and potatoes.
    Spanish Chicken Stew
  • The perfect fall apple cake, seasoned with floral and earthy cardamom, bright orange zest and loaded with chunks of sweet apples. And perfect to serve alongside your favorite warm drink.
    Cardamom Apple Cake
  • Classic osso buco recipe served over creamy polenta and garnished with herb gremolata.
    Osso Buco with Gremolata
  • Easy French seafood stew with shrimp, mussels, clams and halibut.
    Simple Bouillabaisse Recipe (French Seafood Stew)
Buy This Book Online
Buy from Amazon Kindle
Buy from IndieBound
Buy from Barnes and Noble
Buy from Amazon
One Pot Mediterranean
Buy now!

Order My Latest Cookbook!

One Pot Mediterranean cookbook cover

Get my most Popular Seafood Recipes, the ones everyone asks for!

Thank you!

You have successfully joined our subscriber list.

Follow on Bloglovin

Footer

↑ back to top

Featured In

About

  • Privacy Policy
  • Accessibility Policy

Newsletter

  • Sign Up! for emails and updates

Contact

  • Contact

As an Amazon Associate I earn from qualifying purchases.

Copyright © 2025 · Samantha Ferraro · Little Ferraro Kitchen · All Rights Reserved

Rate This Recipe

Your vote:




A rating is required
A name is required
An email is required